Prakrit Grammar and Composition

Author(s): Kamalchand Sogani
Publisher: Apbhramsa Sahitya Academy
Catalog link: https://jainqq.org/explore/006532/1

Page #1

Prākļta Grammar and Composition (English Translation of the Author's Book in Hindi
'Prākta Racanā Saurabha')
Dr. Kamal Chand Sogani
TORRE
E vyrat जैनविद्या संस्थान श्री महावीरजी
Apabhraṁsa Sahitya Academy
Jaina Vidya Saṁsthāna Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Kșetra Śri Mahaviraji
Rajasthan
in Education International

Page #2

Praksta Grammar and Composition (English Translation of the Author's Book in Hindi
'Prakrta Racană Saurabha')
Dr. Kamal Chand Sogani (Former Professor of Philosophy M.L. Sukhadia University
Udaipur)
S.
जाणुज्जाया जैनविधा संस्थान श्री महावीरजी
Apabhraísa Sahitya Academy
Jaina Vidya Saṁsthāna Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Kșetra Śri Mahāvīraji
Rajasthan

*

Page #3

Publisher:
Apabhraṁsa Sahitya Academy
(Jaina Vidya Samsthāna)
Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Kṣetra Śri Mahaviraji Śri Mahaviraji - 322 220 (Rajasthan)
Copies From:
1.
2.
Jaina Vidya Samsthāna
Śri Mahāvīraji - 322 220 (Rajasthan) Telephone: 07469-2224323 Sahitya Vikraya Kendra
Digambara Jaina Nasiyam Bhaṭṭārakaji Savai Rāmasimha Road, Jaipur - 302 004 Tel.: 0141-2385247
All rights reserved
First Edition : 2006
Price: Rs.450/- US$ 20
Computer Typesetting:
Shyam Agarwal
A-336, Malviya Nagar,
Jaipur 302 017 (Rajasthan)
Ph.: 0141-2524138
Printed at:
Jaipur Printers Pvt. Ltd.
M.I. Road, Jaipur - 302 001
Telephone: 0141-2373822, 2362468
...

Page #4

Table of Contents
Lesson No.
Subject
Page No.
Lesson - 1
Lesson - 2
Lesson - 3
Lesson - 4
Prelusive Dedication Introduction Pronoun First Person Singular Number Present Tense Pronoun Second Person Singular Number Present Tense Pronoun Third Person Singular Number Present Tense Pronoun-Singular Non-a-ending Verbs Present Tense Pronoun First Person Plural Number Present Tense Pronoun Second Person Plural Number Present Tense Pronoun Third Person Plural Number Present Tense Pronoun-Plural Non-a-ending Verbs Present Tense Pronoun First Person Singular Number Imperative
Lesson - 5
• Lesson - 6
Lesson - 7
Lesson - 8
11
Lesson - 9
14
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #5

Lesson No.
Subject
Page No.
Lesson - 10
15
Lesson - 11
17
Lesson - 12
18
Lesson - 13
20
Lesson - 14
21
Lesson - 15
23
Pronoun Second Person Singular Number Imperative Pronoun Third Person Singular Number Imperative Pronoun-Singular Non-a-ending Verbs Imperative Pronoun First Person Plural Number Imperative Pronoun Second Person Plural Number Imperative Pronoun Third Person Plural Number Imperative Pronoun-Plural Non-a-ending Verbs Imperative Pronoun-Singular and Plural Past Tense Pronoun-Singular and Plural Non-a-ending Verbs Past Tense Pronoun First Person Singular Number Future Tense Pronoun Second Person Singular Number Future Tense
Lesson - 16
25
Lesson - 17
28
Lesson - 18
30
Lesson - 19
32
Lesson - 20
34
Lesson - 21
36
Pronoun Third Person Singular Number Future Tense
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #6

Lesson No.
Lesson - 22
Lesson - 23
Lesson - 24
Lesson - 25
Lesson - 26
Lesson - 27
Lesson - 28
Lesson - 29
Lesson - 30
Lesson - 31
Lesson - 32
Lesson - 33
Lesson - 34
Lesson - 35
Lesson - 36
Lesson - 37
Subject

Pronoun-Singular
Non-a-ending Verbs
Future Tense
Pronoun
First Person Plural Number
Future Tense
Pronoun
Second Person Plural Number
Future Tense
Pronoun
Third Person Plural Number
Future Tense
Pronoun-Plural
Non-a-ending Verbs
Future Tense
Exercises
Absolutive
Infinitive
Nouns and Verbs
a-ending Nouns Masculine
Intransitive Verbs
a-ending Nouns Masculine
Nominative Case Singular Number
a-ending Nouns Masculine
Nominative Case Plural Number
Exercises
Nouns and Verbs
a-ending Nouns Neuter
Intransitive Verbs
a-ending Nouns Neuter
Nominative Case Singular Number
a-ending Nouns Neuter
Nominative Case Plural Number
Exercises
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page No.
38
40
42
44
46
49
53
56
58
60
62
64
67
69
71
73

Page #7

Lesson No.
Subject
Page No.
Lesson - 38
74
Lesson - 39
76
Lesson - 40
78
80
Lesson - 41 Lesson - 42
81
Lesson - 43 Lesson - 44 Lesson - 45
93
98
Lesson - 46 Lesson - 47
99
Nouns and Verbs å-ending Nouns Feminine Intransitive Verbs å-ending Nouns Feminine Nominative Case Singular Number å-ending Nouns Feminine Nominative Case Plural Number Exercises Past Participle Use in the Active Voice Present Participle Exercises Past Participle Use in the Impersonal Form Exercise Intransitive Verbs Use in the Impersonal Form Exercises Obligatory and Potential Participle Use in the Impersonal Form Exercise Noun-Pronoun Accusative Case Singular Number Transitive Verbs Noun-Pronoun Accusative Case Masculine-Neuter and Feminine Plural Number Transitive Verbs Transitive Verbs Exercises Transitive Verb use in the Active Voice and the Passive Voice Nouns Masculine i-ending, u-ending Transitive Verbs
Lesson - 48 Lesson - 49
106
107
Lesson - 50 Lesson - 51
111 112
Lesson - 52
117
Lesson - 53
120
Lesson - 54
122
Lesson - 55
129
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #8

Lesson No.
Subject
Page No.
Lesson - 56 Lesson - 57
Lesson - 58 Lesson - 59
Lesson - 60 Lesson - 61
Lesson - 62
Lesson - 63 Lesson - 64
Lesson - 65 Lesson - 66
Exercises
131 Past Participle
132 Use in the Passive Voice Exercises
135 i, i-ending and u, ū-ending Nouns
136 Masculine, Neuter and Feminine Transitive Verbs
138 i, i-ending and u, ū-ending Nouns
139 Nominative Case, Instrumental Case Singular Number, Plural Number Obligatory and Potential Participle
144 Its use in the Passive Voice Exercises
148 Different Participles
149 With object in the Accusative Case Exercises
154 Noun-Pronoun
155 Dative and Genitive Case Singular Number Masculine, Neuter and Feminine Noun
158 Dative and Genitive Case Singular Number l-ending, V-ending Masculine and Neuter Noun-Pronoun
160 Dative and Genitive Case Plural Number Masculine, Neuter and Feminine Noun
163 Dative and Genitive Case Plural Number l-ending, U-ending Masculine and Neuter Exercises
165 Noun-Pronoun
166 Ablative Case Singular Number Noun
169 Ablative Case Singular Number Noun
170 Ablative Case Plural Number
Lesson - 67
Lesson - 68
Lesson - 69
Lesson - 70 Lesson - 71
Lesson - 72
Lesson - 73
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
vii

Page #9

Lesson No.
Subject
Page No.
172
174
176
177
179 191
192
Lesson - 74 Noun-Pronoun
Ablative Case Plural Number Lesson - 75 Noun-Pronoun
Locative Case Singular Number Lesson - 76 Noun-Pronoun
Locative Case Plural Number Lesson - 77 Noun
Vocative Case
Singular and Plural Number Lesson - 78 Causative Suffixes Lesson - 79 Retainer of innate meaning
Suffixes (Svarthika Suffixes) Lesson - 80 Different Pronouns
Exercises Lesson - 81 Indeclinables Lesson - 82 Conjugation and Verbal endings Lesson - 83 Conjugation of 'Asa' Lesson - 84 (A) Declensional Forms of Nouns
(B) Declensional Forms of Pronouns (C) Declension of Cardinal numeral Ega
(one) Lesson - 85 Endings of Declensional
forms of Nouns in Prakrta according to
Hemacandra Appendix - 1(a) Noun-Index (English to Prakrta) Appendix - 1(b) Noun-Index (Prakrta to English) Appendix - 2(a) Verb-Index (English to Pråkrta) Appendix - 2(b) Verb-Index (Prāksta to English) Reference Books
194 195 198
199
223
238 249 262 272 284
vill
Pråksta Grammar and Composition

Page #10

Diacritical Marks
Vowels
o
au
Consonants
jam
شر م
5
اكر ا
5
9
ر م
م
م
مهر ه
3
لكر -
م ه
(Anusvára)
: (Visarga)
Pråksta Grammar and Composition

Page #11

Page #12

Prelusive
We feel great pleasure in placing the book ‘Prākta Grammar and Composition' in the hands of the readers. In fact, this book is the english translation of the second edition of 'Prākstā Racana Saurabha' published in 2003 by the Apabhraíša Sāhitya Academy, Jaipur.
It goes without saying that Prāksta language is one of the richest Indo-Aryan languages. It is the most ancient and sacred language of India. The early Vedic literature is not averse to Prāksta expressions, which indicate its ancient character. It is incontrovertible that Práksta was the mother-tongue of Mahavira and Buddha, who used this language as the medium of their sermons. Prākrta, the flowing language gave rise to Apabhraíša in course of time.
It is of capital importance to note that Prāksta is the language of the masses. Its vast literature in varied literary forms contributes to the dignity and excellence of the cultural heritage of Indian tradition. The author of the Agamas and their commentaries, Kundakunda, Hāla, Vimalasuri, Sivärya, Vattakera, Haribhadra, Väkapatiraja, Pravarasene, Nemicandra, Kartikeya Svāmi, Hemacandra etc. are the celebrated literary personalities of Prāksta language.
In the 3rd century B.C. it was the lingua franca of Northern India. From East to West and Kaśmir (North) to Mahārāştra (South), it has served the need of literary world as also of the common men. It is to the credit of Praksta language that it has given rise to Apabhraíša language from which the modern Indian languages like, Sindhi, Pañjābi, Marathi, Bengali, Gujarāti, Kaśmiri, Maithili, Rajasthani, Udiya etc. have grown. Even the national language Hindi owes its origin to Prākta and Apabhraṁsa. Most of the literary tendencies in Hindi literature flow from the glorious
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #13

tradition of Präkṛta and Apabhraṁśa language. Thus the relation between Prakrta-Apabhramsa and Hindi is very intimate. In consequence, the proper understanding of Präkṛta and Apabhramsa language and literature is indispensible for comprehending the development of Hindi literature rightly and adequately.
Recognising the importance of Prākṛta and Apabhramsa languages in the cultural history of India, the Managing Committe of Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Kṣetra, Śri Mahāvīraji established Apabhraṁśa Sahitya Academy in 1988, which run correspondence courses for teaching Prakrta and Apabhramsa languages. The Academy has published books for the implementation of these couses. Books on Prākṛta Grammar and Composition and Apabhraṁśa Grammar and Composition have been published for those desirous of learning Prākṛta and Apabhraṁśa languages through Hindi medium. For teaching Prakrta language to the English knowing people, our new publication, 'Prākṛta Grammar and Composition' which is the english translation of 'Prākṛta Racană Saurabha' in Hindi will facilitate the learning of Prākṛta to the students of english language. Apabhramsa Grammar and Composition has already been published in 2005.
We offer our thanks to the learned researchers of the Samsthana (Institute) specially Smt. Shakuntala Jain and to M/s Jaipur Printers Pvt. Ltd. for organising the publication of the book.
Naresh Kumar Sethi
President
xii
Managing Committee Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Kṣetra Śri Mahaviraji

Narendra Patni Secretary
Dr. Kamal Chand Sogani Samyojaka
Jaina Vidya Samsthāna Samiti
Jaipur
26 January, 2006
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #14

Dedicated
To Dr. A.N. Upadhye
And Dr. Hiralal Jain

Page #15

Page #16

Introduction
Relating to Prākrta language, the following should be understood.
Alphabets of Präkta
Vowels अ, आ, इ, ई, उ, ऊ, ए, ओ a, ā, 1, i, u, ū, e, o
Consonants
ka, kha, ga, gha, na 7, , 5, 5, ca, cha, ja, jha, ña a 3, 3, 7, o ta, tha, da, dha, ņa a, 91, 2, ta, tha, da, dha, na
pa, pha, ba, bha, ma
, , , a ya, ra, la, va
sa, ha . (Anusvāra)
(Anunásika)
m,
It may be noted here that in Prakrta the use of na and ña is not found in non-conjunct form. In Hemacandra Prākta Grammar the use of na and ña in conjunct form is traceable. The use of na is seen in conjunct and non-conjunct form. The alternative of na, na, na in conjunct form is m.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
XV

Page #17

Number :
In Präksta language, there are only two numbers :1. Singular
2. Plural Gender:
In Präkrta language, there are three Genders :1. Masculine Gender
2. Feminine Gender 3. Neuter Gender Person :
In Prāksta language, there are only three Persons :1. First Person
2. Second Person 3. Third Person Case :
In Prakrta language, there are eight Cases :1. Nominative Case
2. Accusative Case 3. Instrumental Case
4. Dative Case 5. Ablative Case
6. Genitive Case 7. Locative Case
8. Vocative Case Verb:
In Prakrta language, there are only two kinds of Verbs :1.Transitive
2. Intransitive Tense :
In Prākta language, there are four type of Tenses :1. Present Tense
2. Past Tense 3. Future Tense
4. Imperative Words :
In Prakrta languages, four kinds of Words are in use :1. a-ending
2. i-i-ending 3. á- ending
4. u-u-ending
xvi
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #18

The Vocalic sounds of the Devanagari Syllabary in combination with the
consonants of the syllabary
क
का
कि
की
कु
कू
के
के
को
ki
ki
kha
ख kha
खा khá
खि khi
खी khi
खु khu
खू khó
खे khe
खो kho
ga
ग ga
गा gå
गि gi
गी gi
गु gu
गू gu
गे ge
गो go
gha
घ gha
घा ghẻ
घि ghi
घी ghi
घु chu
घू phủ
घे ghe
घो gho
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
xvii

Page #19

डा
ङी hi
| ha
na
hả
hi
hu
hu
he
no
الفو
च ca
चा ca
चि củ
ची cử
चु cu
चे ce
चो co
छ cha
छा cha
छि chi
छी chi
छु chu
छू chủ
छे che
छो cho
لكي
الكو
5
जि जी jiji
ja
E
=
झ jha
झा jhả
झि jhi
झी jhi
झु jhu
झू jhů
झे jhe
झो jho
xvill
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #20

ञ
ञा
जा
जि
जी
जु
ने
जो
الكو :=
na
hu
ट
टा
टि
टी
टु tu
टू
टे
टो
I
ठठा tha thả
ठि thi
ठी thể
ठु thu
ठू thu
ठे the
ठो tho
ड da
डा da
डि di
dà
di
du
du
de
do
ढ ढा ढिढी दु dha dha dhi dhidhu
दू dhủ
ढे dhe
ढो dho
xix
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #21

ण
na
त
ta
थ
tha
da
ध
dha
XX
ण
na
त
ta
थ
tha
द
da
ध
dha

णा
nå
ता
tā
था
thå
दा
dā
धा
dhā
णि
2. P
ņi
ti
थि
thi
47
दि
धि
णी
ni
dhi
ti
थी
thi
दी
45
di di
णु
nu
tu
थु
thu
दु
du
धी धु
dhi
dhu
णू
ņū

لحوت
तू
tū
थू
thū
दू
dū
धू
dhū
णे
ne
न
te
थे
the
de
ds
dhe
णो
no
तो
to
थो
tho
दो
do
धो
dho
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #22

케
na
대
pa
फ
མ
pha
Ba
भ
Bha
म
Ma
न
na
प
pa
फ
pha
ब
ba
म
ma
ना
nã

पा
pă
फा
phă
भ भा
bha bhā
बा
bā
मा
må
ni
पि
pi
फि
phi
बि
bi
भि
bhi
मि
mi
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
नी नु
ni
प
pi
फी
phi
बी
bi
भ
bhi
+
nu
64
पु
pu
फु
phu
बु
bu
मी मु
mi
mu
नू

nū
पू
pū
फू
یا
phů
बू...
bū
मू
ने
mů
ne
पे
pe
भु
भू
भे
bhu bhū bhe
ㄓ
phe
बे
be
मे
me
नो
no
पो
po
फो
pho
बो
bo
भो
bho
मो
mo
xxl

Page #23

4
या
यो
, 4
ya
ya
5
yo
ra
rå
ri
ri
ru
rü
re
r o
लि
العو
ले
लो
lilu
=
व va
ब
वा vă
वि vi
वी vi
वु vu
वू vů
वे ve
वो vo
स sa
सा så
सि si
सी si
सु su
सू sů
से se
सो so
ह. ha
हा hả
हि hi
ही hi
हु hu
हु hu
हे he
हो họ
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #24

Aham/Ham/Ammi = I
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa - To laugh
Rusa - To sulk
=
Jiva
- To live
Aham
Ham
Ammi
Aham
Ham
Ammi
Aham
Ham
Ammi
Lesson 1
Pronoun
=

First Person Singular Number
Saya
Lukka To hide
=
To sleep
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
Present Tense
Nacca
Jagga
Hasami/Hasāmi/Hasemi
Lukkami/Lukkämi/Lukkemi
= To dance
=
Naccami/Naccami/Naccemi = I dance.
To wake up
= I laugh.
1. Aham/Haṁ/Ammi = 1, First Person Singular Number (Personal Pronoun).

2. In the First Person Singular of the Present Tense mi suffix is used in the Verbs. In using mi suffix in the Verbs a of a-ending Verbs is also changed into ȧ and e.
3. Sometimes in place of 'Hasami' 'Hasami' etc. 'Hasam', 'Naccam' etc. forms are used (Hem. Pr. Gr. 3-141).
= I hide.
4. All the above verbs are Intransitive. An Intransitive Verb is that which has no object and whose effect is only on the subject or doer. 'I laugh', in this sentence, the effect of laughing is on I, and the Verb 'laugh' has no object.
5. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. In these sentences Person and Number of the Verbs are according to the Subject, Aham/Ham/Ammi. Here Aham/Ham/Ammi is in the First Person Singular, so the Verbs are also of the First Person Singular Number.
1

Page #25

Lesson 2
Pronoun Tumam/Tum/Tuha = You Second Person Singular Number Intransitive Verbs
Hasa =To laugh Saya - To sleep Ņacca = To dance Rusa =To sulk Lukka = To hide Jagga = To wake up Jiva =To live
Present Tense
Tumaṁ Tum
Hasasi/Hasase/Hasesi
-You laugh.
Tuha
Tumam Tum Tuha
Tumm}
Naccasi/Naccase/Naccesi
= You dance.
Tumam Tum Tuha
Lukkasi/Lukkase/Lukkesi
=You hide.
1. (i)
(ii)
Tumam/Tum/Tuha - You, Second Person Singular Number
(Personal Pronoun). in Ardhamågadhi Tumam, Tum, Tume are used. (Pischel, Grammar of the Prāksta Languages, P. 617) In the Second Person Singular of the Present Tense 'si' and 'se' suffixes are used in the Verbs. In using 'si' suffix in the Verbs, 'a' of 'a-ending' Verbs is also changed into 'e'. If there is no 'a'-ending Verb, 'se' suffix is not used. (see lesson
2. ()
(ii)
4)
All the above verbs are Intransitive. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. In these sentences Person and Number of the Verbs are according to the Subject. Here Tumam/Tum/Tuha is in the Second Person Singular, so the Verbs are also of the Second Person Singular Number.
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #26

Lesson 3
Pronoun
So = He (Masculine). Så - She (Feminine)
Third Person Singular Number
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa =To laugh Rusa -To sulk Jiva =To live
Saya = To sleep Ņacca - To dance Lukka - To hide Jagga - To wake up
Present Tense
So Hasai/Hasae/Hasadi/Hasade/Hasei/Hasedi Så Hasai/Hasae/Hasadi/Hasade/Hasei/Hasedi
- He laughs. - She laughs.
So Naccai/Naccae/Naccadi/Naccade/Naccei/Naccedi - He dances. Så Naccai/Naccae/Naccadi/Naccade/Naccei/Ņaccedi - She dances.
So Lukkai/Lukkae/Lukkadi/Lukkade/Lukkei/Lukkedi - He hides. Så Lukkai/Lukkae/Lukkadi/Lukkade/Lukkei/Lukkedi - She hides.
1. (i) So : He (Masculine), Sá - She (Feminine) Third Person Singular Number
(Personal Pronoun) (ii) Sa = He (Masculine) is also used.
(iii) In Ardhamågadhi, 'Se': He (Masculinel is also used. (Pischel P. 622) 2. (i) In the Third Person Singular of the Present Tense 'i', 'e', 'di' and 'de'
suffixes are used in the verbs. In using 'i'and di' suffixes in the verbs
a of a-ending verbs is also changed into 'e'. (ii) 'e' and 'de' suffixes are used only in ‘a'- ending verbs. In the a, o, u
etc. ending verbs 'e' and 'de' are not used, as, in the Verbs, Tha = To stay Ho - To become Hu - To become 'e' and 'de' suffixes are not
used in the Present Tense. (See lesson - 4) (iii) In the Third Person Singular Number, Ti suffix is also used as, Hasati/
Haseti, Ņaccati/Nacceti, Lukkati/Lukketi. - Pt. Becaradásaji has mentioned the use of 'Te suffix in the a-ending verbs, as,
Hasate/Hasete. (Prāksta Mārgopadeśikä p. 140.) 3. All the above Verbs are Intransitive. 4. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #27

Lesson 4
Pronoun - Singular Non- 'a'-ending Verbs i.e., á, o etc. ending verbs Aham/Haṁ/Ammi = 1 (First Person Singular) . Tumam/Tum/Tuha - You (Second Person Singular) So
- He (Masculine) (Third Person Singular)
- She (Feminine) Intransitive Verbs
Țhả : To stay Ņha = To bathe Ho : To become
Så
Present Tense
Aham Ham Ammi
Thảmi
: I stay.
Aham
Homi
= I become.
Ham Ammi
Tumam
Tum
Thåst
- You stay.
Tuha
s
nast
Tumar Tum Tuha
Hosi
- You become.
So
Så
Thải/Thằdi Thải/Thằdi Hoi/Hodi Hoi/Hodi
: He stays. - She stats. - He becomes. : She becomes.
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #28

1. Aham/Ham/Ammi = 1 First Person Singular Personal
Tumaṁ/Tum/Tuha - You Second Person Singular > Pronouns So : He (Masculine)
Singular Så : She (Feminine) Third Person Singular
2. (i) In the Present Tense of the non-a-ending verbs i.e., å, o etc. ending
verbs of the Second Person Singular, only 'si' suffix is used. 'se' suffix is not used. (ii) Likewise in the Third Person Singular only 'l' and 'di' suffixes are used, 'e' and 'de' suffixes are not used.
3. All the above verbs are Intransitive.
4. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
Prákyta Grammar and Composition
on

Page #29

Lesson 5
Pronoun
Amhe 1: We both/We all
First Person Plural Number Vayam S Intransitive Verbs
Hasa - To laugh Saya = To sleep Ņacca - To dance Rusa = To sulk Lukka - To hide Jagga = To wake up Jiva = To live
Present Tense
Amhe 1 Vayam )
Hasamo/Hasåmo/Hasimo/Hasemo/ Hasamu/Hasāmu/Hasimu/Hasemu/ Hasama/Hasáma/Hasima/Hasema
=
We both laugh. We all laugh.
Amhe) Vayam
Naccamo/Naccămo/Naccimo/Naccemo/ Naccamu/Naccamu/Naccimu/Naccemu/ -
We both dance.
We all dance. Naccama/Naccâma/Naccima/Naccema
Amhe Vayam si
Lukkamo/Lukkåmo/Lukkimo/Lukkemo/
We both hide. Lukkamu/Lukkamu/Lukkimu/Lukkemu/ =
We all hide. Lukkama/Lukkāma/Lukkima/Lukkema
Amhe
First Person Plural Number : We both/We all Vayam
(Personal Pronoun) In the First Person Plural of the Present Tense mo, mu and ma suffixes are used in the Verbs. In using ‘mo', 'mu' and 'ma' suffixes, the 'a' of a- ending Verbs is also changed into 'a', 'i' and 'e'. All the above verbs are Intransitive. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. Here the Subject is in the First Person Plural, so the Verb is also of the First Person Plural Number.
Pråksta Grammar and Composition

Page #30

Lesson 6
Pronoun
Tubbhe Tumhe You both/You all Second Person Plural Number Tujjhe Intransitive Verbs
Hasa = To laugh Saya = To sleep Ņacca - To dance Rúsa To sulk Lukka - To hide Jagga - To wake up Jiva = To live
Present Tense
Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
Hasaha/Hasitthå/Hasadha/ Haseha/Haseittha/Hasedha
You both laugh. “You all laugh.
)
Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
Naccaha/Naccitthā/Naccadha/_You both dance. Nacceha/Nacceitthă/Naccedha You all dance.
)
Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
Lukkaha/Lukkitthå/Lukkadha/ You both hide. Lukkeha/Lukkeittha/Lukkedha You all hide.
)
1. Tubbhe
Tumhe Tujjhe
Second Person Plural
(Personal Pronoun)
You both/You all
)
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #31

In the Second Person Plural of the Present Tense ha, ittha and dha suffixes are used in the verbs and in using a of a-ending verbs is changed into e.
All the above verbs are Intransitive. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. Here the Subject is in the Second Person Plural, so the Verb is used in the Second Person Plural Number.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #32

Lesson 7
Pronoun
Te : They both (Masculine)/They all (Masculine) Third Person Plural Tä/Tão/Tàu - They both (Feminine)/They all (Feminine) Number
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa : To laugh Saya = To sleep Rūsa : To sulk Lukka - To hide Jiva = To live
Ņacca = To dance Jagga - To wake up
Present Tense
re
Hasanti/Hasantel Hasenti/Hasire
- They both laugh.
They all laugh.
Tá/Tão/Tàu
eu
oth laugh.
Hasanti/Hasante/ Hasenti/Hasire
They all laugh.
Te
Naccanti/Naccante! Naccenti/Naccire
They both dance. They all dance.
Tă/Tảo/Tẩu
Naccanti/Naccante Naccenti/Naccire
. They both dance.
They all dance.
Lukkanti/Lukkantel Lukkenti/Lukkire
They both hide. They all hide.
Tá/Tåo/Tàu
Lukkanti/Lukkantel Lukkenti/Lukkire
They both hide. They all hide.
Prāksta Grammar and Composition

Page #33

1. Te They both (Masculine)/They all (Masculine)
Ta/Tao/Tau = They both (Feminine)/They all (Feminine),
2. In the Third Person Plural of the Present Tense 'nti', 'nte' and 'ire' suffixes are used in the verbs.
3. In using nti suffix a of a-ending verbs is also change into e.
4. All the above verbs are Intransitive.
5. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. Here the Subject is in the Third Person Plural, so the verb is also of the Third Person Plural Number.
10

Third Person Plural (Personal Pronoun)
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #34

Lesson 8
Pronoun - Plural Non- 'a'-ending verbs i.e., ā, o etc. ending verbs
Amhe
. We both/We all
Vayam
First Person
Plural
Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
So You both/You all
Second Person
Plural
Te: They both (Masculine)/They all (Masculine) Tå/Táo/Tàu - They both (Feminine)/They all (Feminine)
Third Person Plural
Intransitive Verbs
Țhå - To stay
Ņhá - To bathe
Ho - To become
Present Tense
Thămo/Thămu/
Amhe Vayam
We both stay. We all stay.
s
Tháma
Homo/Homu/
Amhe Vayam
We both become. We all become.
s
Homa
Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
Thāha/Thadha/ Thāitthā
You both stay. You all stay.
Tubbhe
Hoha/Hodha/
You both become.
Tumhe Tujjhe
S
Hoittha
You all become.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #35

Te
Thanti-Thanti/
Thante→Thante/Thǎire
(See Rule four below)
Ta/Tȧo/Tau Thanti-Thanti/
Te
1.
Ta/Tão/Tau Honti/Honte/Hoire
2.
3.
4.
5.
Amhe
Vayam
12
Tubbhe
Tumhe
Tujjhe
Thante Thante/Thäire
=
Honti/Honte/Hoire
Te: They both (Masculine)/They all (Masculine)
Ta/Tão/Tau
They both (Feminine)/
They all (Feminine)
All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
}

= We both/We all
First Person
mi Second Person si, se
Third Person
=
i, e, di, de
=
=1
They both stay. They all stay.
= You both/You all Second Person Plural

They both stay.
They all stay.
They both become.
They all become.
They both become.
They all become.
First Person Plural
All the above Sentences are in the Active Voice. In these sentences Verbs agree with the Subject in Number and Person. If there is a long vowel before a Conjunct Letter it becomes short as, Thanti-Thanti. In Prakrta 'a', '1', 'u', 'e' and 'o' are regarded as short vowels and 'a', 'i' and 'u' are long vowels. Suffixes of the Present Tense (Lesson 1 to 8)
Singular
Plural
Third Person Plural
Personal Pronouns Plural
mo, mu, ma
ha, itthä, dha
nti, nte, ire
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #36

6. (i)
In both Numbers (Singular and Plural) and three Persons (Fisrt, Second and Third) of the a-ending verbs of the Present Tense 'ja', 'ijā' suffixes are used. In using 'jja', 'ja' suffixes a of aending verbs is changed into 'e'as Hasa + jja - Hasejja, Hasa + jjä = Hasejja. Aham/Ham/Ammi
= I laugh. Amhel Vayam
: We all laugh. Tumaṁ/Tum/Tuha
: You laugh. Tubbhe/Tumhe/Tujjhe
- Yau all laugh.
Hasejja/ So
- He laughs. Hasejja
• She laughs.
: They (all) laugh. Tá/Tạo/Tàu
: They (all) laugh.
Sá
Te
(iii)
In both numbers of three persons of the a-ending, o-ending etc. verbs in the Present Tense, jja, ijă suffixes are also used. Ho + jja, jjā - Hojja/Hojja Nha + jja, jja - Nhajja/Nhajja Thā + jja, jjá - Thājja/Thājjā After adding 'a'to the a-ending, o-ending etc. verbs, jja, ijä suffixes are also added. In adding these suffixes, added 'a' is changed into 'e' like the a of a-ending verbs. Tha + a: Thảa - Thãejja/Thaejja Ho + a = Hoa - Hoejja/Hoejjā Ņha + a: Ņhaa -Ņhaejja/Nhãejja
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
13

Page #37

Lesson 9
Pronoun
Aham/Haṁ/Ammi = I
First Person Singular Number
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa - To laugh Rūsa =To sulk Jiva : To live
Saya = To sleep Lukka - To hide
Ņacca - To dance Jagga = To wake up
Imperative
Aham Ham
Hasamu/Hasámu/ Hasimu/Hasemu
- I should/may laugh.
Ammi
Aham Ham Ammi
Naccamu/Naccămu/ Naccimu/Naccemu
= I should/may dance.
Aham Ham Ammi
Lukkamu/Lukkāmu/ Lukkimu/Lukkemu
- I should/may hide.
1. Aham/Ham/Ammi = 1, First Person Singular (Personal Pronoun)
2. For expressing command, injunction, prayer etc. the suffixes of
Imperative are used in the Verbs.
3. (i) In the First Person Singular of the Imperative 'mu' suffix is used
in the Verbs. In using 'mu' suffix, a of'a'-ending verbs is changed also into 'a', 'l', and 'e'.
(ii) In Ardhamăgadhi, the suffixes of the First Person Singular of the Imperative are ‘ejjā' and 'ejjāmi’. Thus the verbal inflexion of 'Hasa' will be ‘Hasejja, 'Hasejjami'. (Pischel p. 680)
14
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #38

Lesson 10
Pronoun
Tumaṁ/Tuṁ/Tuha - You
Second Person Singular Number
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa - To laugh Rusa - To sulk Jiva =To live
Saya - To sleep Lukka = To hide
Ņacca - To dance Jagga = To wake up
Imperative
Tumam Tum
Hasahi/Hasasu/Hasadhi/Hasal. Hasehi/Hasesu/Hasedhi/ = You should/may laugh. Hasejjasu/Hasejjahi/Hasejje
Tuha
Tumam) Tum Tuha
Naccahi/Naccasu/Naccadhi/Nacca / Naccehi/Naccesu/Naccedhil You should/may dance. Ņaccejjasu/Ņaccejjahi/Naccejje
Tumam) Tum Tuha
Lukkahi/Lukkasu/Lukkadhi/Lukka/ Lukkehi/Lukkesu/Lukkedhi/ - You should/may hide. Lukkejjasu/Lukkejjahi/Lukkejje
1. (i)
(ii)
Tumam/Tum/Tuha - You, Second Person Singular Number
(Personal Pronoun) In Ardhamågadhi, Tumam, Tum, Tume are used. (Pischel Page. 617) In the Second Person Singular of the Imperative 'hi', 'su','zero' ‘ijjasu’ ‘ijjahi', 'ijje' and 'dhi' suffixes are used in the Verbs. In using 'hi', 'su' and 'dhi' suffixes 'a' of a-ending Verbs is
2. (i)
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
15

Page #39

also changed into 'e'. In using ‘iljasu', 'ijjahi' and 'ijje' suffixes in the verbs, the 'a' of a-ending verbs and 'l' of the suffixes combine to form 'e': (a+i). 'Zero' suffix and 'ijjasu', 'ijjhi' and 'ijje' suffixes are used in the a-ending verbs. In non-a-ending verbs i.e. å, o etc. ending verbs, the above suffixes are not used. In Ardhamagadhi, for the Second Person Singular of the imperative 'ejja', 'ejjasi', 'ejjahi' suffixes are used. Thus the verbal inflexion of 'Hasa' will be - ‘Hasejja', 'Hasejjasi', 'Hasejjåhi' (Pischel, P. 681, 682). All the above verbs are Intransitive. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
(iii)
16
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #40

So He (Masculine)
Så She (Feminine)
=
Intransitive Verbs
1. (i)
Hasa To laugh Rusa To sulk
=
Jiva = To live
So Hasau/Haseu/Hasadu/Hasedu/ Så Hasau/Haseu/Hasadu/Hasedu
3.
4.
Lesson 1 1 Pronoun
(ii)
(iii)
2. (i)
=
Saya
To sleep
Lukka = To hide
Third Person Singular Number
Imperative
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

So Naccau/Nacceu/Naccadu/Naccedu/= He should/may dance. Så Naccau/Nacceu/Naccadu/Naccedu
She should/may dance.
=
So Lukkau/Lukkeu/Lukkadu/Lukkedu/ He should/may hide. Sa Lukkau/Lukkeu/Lukkadu/Lukkedu = She should/may hide.
=
Nacca
Jagga
=
So
Så She (Feminine)
Sa = He (Masculine) is also used.
In Ardhamȧgadhi 'se' = He (Masculine) is also used. (Pischel Page 622)
In the Third Person Singular of the Imperative 'u' and 'du' suffixes are used in the Verbs. In using 'u' and 'du' suffixes, 'a' of a-ending Verbs is changed into 'e' also.
(ii)
In Ardhamȧgadhi ‘e' and 'ejjä' suffixes are used in the Third Person Singular of the Imperative. 'Hase', 'Hasejja' are the verbal inflexions of the verb 'Hasa'. (Pischel Page. 683-684) All the above verbs are Intransitive.
All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
= To dance
= To wake up
He should/may laugh.
She should/may laugh.
=
He (Masculine) Third Person Singular Number
(Personal Pronoun)

17

Page #41

Lesson 12
Pronoun-Singular
Non 'a'-ending verbs i.e., å, o etc. ending verbs
Aham/Haṁ/Ammi; I First Person Singular Tumam/Tum/Tuha - You Second Person Singular So : He (Masculine) Så = She (Feminine)
Third Person Singular Intransitive Verbs
Thả = To stay Ņha = To bathe Ho: To become
Imperative
Imperau
Ahar
Thamu
I should/may stay.
Ham Ammi
Aham Ham Ammi
Homu
- I should/may become.
Tumam Tum Tuha
Thāhi/Thāsu /Thadhi/ - You should/may stay.
Tumam Tum Tuha
Hohi/Hosu/Hodhi
- You should/may become.
So
Thäu/Thidu Thẫu/Thádu
- He should/may stay. - She should/may stay.
Så
Hou/Hodu Hou/Hodu
- He should/may become. - She should/may become.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #42

1. Aham/Ham/Ammi = 1 First Person Singular | Personal
Tumam/Tum/Tuha - You Second Person Singular Pronouns So : He (Masculinel )
Third Person Singular | Sá - She (Feminine)
Singular
2. (i) In Ardhamågadhi, the Verbal inflexion in the Imperative is :
First Person Singular Thãejjā, Thảejjami, Hojjā, Hojjāmi Second Person Singular Thāejjà, Thāejjäsi, Thãejjāhi,
Hojjā, Hojjäsi, Hojjāhi Third Person Singular Thāejja, Hojjā (ii) In Ardhamagadhi, ‘ejja' suffix is used in the å-ending verbs. But the 'e' of 'ejja' is removed from the o-ending and e-ending verbs. (Ghátage P. 129) (iii) In the Second Person Singular of the å-ending, o-ending etc. verbs only ‘hi', 'su', 'dhi' suffixes are used, 'ijjasu', 'ijjahi', 'ijje' are not used.
3. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
4. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
19

Page #43

Lesson 13
Pronoun
Amhe
= We both/We all
First Person Plural Number
Vayam s
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa =To laugh Saya = To sleep Ņacca = To dance Rúsa To sulk Lukka - To hide Jagga = To wake up Jiva =To live
Imperative Amhe Hasamo/Hasámol We both should/may laugh. Vayam S Hasemo
We all should/may laugh.
Amhe Vayam
Naccamo/Naccảmo! We both should/may dance. Ņaccemo
We all should/may dance.
Amhe Vayam
Lukkamo/Lukkāmo/ Lukkemo
We both should/may hide. We all should/may hide.
Amhe
• We both/We all First Person Plural Number Vayar
(Personal Pronoun) (i) In the First Person Plural of the Imperative ‘mo'suffix is used in the Verbs. In using 'mo' suffix in the verbs a of 'a'-ending verbs is changed into 'ä' and 'e'. (ii) In Ardhamagadhi, 'ejjama'suffix is used in the First Person Plural of the Imperative. The Verbal inflexion of 'Hasa' will be “Hasejjama' (Ghătage P. 129).
All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
All the above sentences are in the Actice Voice.
20
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #44

Lesson 14
Pronoun
Tubbhe) Tumhe Tujjhe
You both/You all
Second Person Plural Number
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa - To laugh Rusa =To sulk Jiva - To live
Saya = To sleep Lukka: To hide
Ņacca - To dance Jagga = To wake up
Imperative
Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
Hasaha/Haseha/ Hasadha/Hasedha
You both should/may laugh. You all should/may laugh.
Naccaha/Naccehal S Naccadha/Naccedha
You both should/may dance. You all should/may dance.
ubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
Lukkaha/Lukkehal ( Lukkadha/Lukkedha
You both should/may hide. You all should/may hide.
1. Tubbhe
Tumhe ? You both/You all Second Person Plural Number Tujjhe
(Personal Pronoun) (i) In the Second Person Plural of the Imperative 'ha' and 'dha' suffixes are used in the Verbs. In using 'ha' and 'dha' suffixes, a of 'a'-ending Verbs is changed into 'e'.
Praksta Grammar and Composition
21

Page #45

3.
4.
22
(ii) In Ardhamȧgadhi, ‘ejjāha' suffix is used in the Second Person Plural of the Imperative. So the verbal inflexion of 'Hasa' will be: 'Hasejjäha' (Ghätage P. 129)
All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.

Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #46

Lesson 15
Pronoun Te : They both (Masculine)/They all (Masculine)
Third Tä/Tão/Tàu - They both (Feminine)/They all (Feminine) s Person
Plural
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa : To laugh Rusa = To sulk Jiva To live
Saya = To sleep Ņacca - To dance Lukka - To hide Jagga = To wake up
Imperative
Te
Hasantu/Hasentu
. They both should/may laugh.
They all should/may laugh. They both should/may laugh. They all should/may laugh.
Tä/Tão/Tàu
Hasantu/Hasentu
Те
Naccantu/Naccentu :
They both should/may dance. They all should/may dance. They both should/may dance. They all should/may dance.
Tä/Tão/Tàu
Naccantu/Naccentu :
Te
Lukkantu/Lukkentu =
They both should/may hide. They all should/may hide. They both should/may hide. They all should/may hide.
TiTao/Tau
Lukkantu/Lukkentu :
1. Te - They both (Masculine)/They all (Masculine)
Third Person
Plural (Personal Tå/Tão/Tau = They both (Femininel/They all (Feminine) S'
Pronoun)
Praksta Grammar and Composition
23

Page #47

2.
(i) In the Third Person Plural of the Imperative ‘ntu' suffix is used in the Verbs. In using 'ntu' suffix in the Verbs, a of 'a'-ending Verbs is changed into 'e' also.
(ii) In Ardhamȧgadhi, ‘ejjä' suffix is used in the Third Person Plural of the Imperative. So, the verbal inflexion of 'Hasa' wii be 'Hasejja' (Ghǎtage P 129)
3. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
4.
24

Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #48

Lesson 16
Pronoun - Plural Non-a- ending Verbs i.e., å, o etc. ending Verbs
Amhe
= We both/We all
First Person
Plural
Vayam $
Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
= You both/You all
Second Person
Plural
Te - They both (Masculine)/They all (Masculine) Tả/Táo/Tau - They both (Feminine)/They all (Feminine)
Third Person Plural
Intransitive Verbs
Thá: To stay
Nhà : To bathe
Ho : To become
Amhe
Thamo
Imperative
We both should/may stay. We all should/may stay.
Vayam
s
Amhe Vaya
Home
S
We both should/may become. We all should/may become.
1
Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
Thāhal Thādha
You both should/may stay. You all should/may stay.
Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
Hohal Hodha
You both should/may become. You all should/may become.
)
Те
Thántu-Thantu
They both should/may stay. They all should/may stay.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
25

Page #49

Tả/Tạo/Tàu
Thăntu-Thanfu
Те
Hontu
They both should/may stay. • They all should/may stay.
They both should/may become. They all should/may become. They both should/may become. They all should/may become.
Tå/Tao/Tau Hontu
1. Amhe
Vayam
: We both/We all
First Person Plural
Tubbhe Tumhe S
: You both/You all
Second Person Plural
Personal Pronouns Plural
Tujjhe
Third Person
Te: They both (Masculinel/They all (Masculine) Tå/Tao/Tàu : They both (Feminine)/
They all (Feminine)
Plural
a
All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
mi
All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
4.
w
If a long Vowel precedes the Conjunct letter, it becomes short, as : Thantu-Thantu. In Prāksta á, i and u are regarded as long Vowels, a, i, u, e and o are regarded as short vowels. Suffixes of Imperative (Lesson 9 to 16) Singular
Plural First Person mu
mo Second Person hi, su, dhi, zero ha, dha
ijjasu, ijjahi, ijje Third Person u, du
ntu
26
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #50

6. (i)
Suffixes of the Imperative in Ardhamågadhi : Singular
Pluaral First Person ejjā, ejjāmi,
ejjáma Second Person ejjā, ejjāsi, ejjähi ejjäha Third Person e, ejjā
(Ghấtage P.129) (Pischel P.675)
ejja
(ii)
In Ardhamagadhi Conjugation of a-ending 'Hasa'.
In the Imperative is : Singular
Plural First Person Hasejjā, Hasejjāmi
Hasejjāma Second Person Hasejjā, Hasejjasi, Hasejjahi Hasejjaha Third Person Hase, Hasejja
Hasejjā
In Ardhamagadhi Conjugation of a-ending 'Tha'.
In the Imperative is : Singular
Plural First Person Thāejjā, Thāejjāmi
Thãejjama Second Person Thãejjā, Thāejjāsi, Thãejjāhi -- Thãejjäha Third Person Thãe, Thãejjā
Thảejja
In Ardhamăgadhi Conjugation of o-ending 'Ho'.
In the Imperative is : Singular
Plural First Person Hoejjā, Hoejjāmi,
Hojjama Second Person Hoejjā, Hoejjāsi, Hoejjahi Hojjäha Third Person Hoe, Hoejjā
Hojjä
In Ardhamagadhi suffixes 'ejjama' etc. in the Plural of å-ending Verbs are used but in o-ending, e-ending Verbs 'e' is removed from the Plural of all the Persons. (Ghātage P. 129)
Pråksta Grammar and Composition
27

Page #51

Lesson 17 Pronoun-Singular and Plural
Singular
Plural Aham/Ham/Ammi :)
Amhe /Vayam - We both/ We all Tumam/Tuṁ/Tuha - You Tubbhe /Tumhe/Tujjhe = You both/you all So : He (Masculine)
Te : They both (Masculine)
They all (Masculine) Så = She (Feminine)
Tå/Tão/Tàu : They both (Feminine)/
They all (Feminine)
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa - To laugh Rusa .To sulk Jiva =To live
Saya = To sleep Lukka - To hide
Ņacca - To dance Jagga - To wake up
Past Tense
Aham Haṁ Ammi
Hasia
= I laughed.
Tumam Tum Tuha
Hasia
- You laughed.
Hasia
- He laughed.
Så
Hasia
- She laughed.
Amhe Vayam s
Hasia
. We both/We all laughed.
28
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #52

Tubbhe
Tumhe
Tujjhe
Te
Tå
Tão
Tâu
Hasia
Hasia

Hasia
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
= You both/You all laughed.
=
They both/They all laughed.
1. In the First, Second and Third Person Singular and Plural of the Past Tense. 'ia' suffix is used in the a-ending Verbs.
2. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
3. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
4. In Ardhamāgadhi, the Past Tense is formed by ading 'ittha' and 'imsu' suffixes to the a-ending, a-ending, o-ending etc. verbs in all the three Persons and the two Numbers. as, Hasittha/Hasimsu, Naccittha/Nacciṁsu (Pischel. P. 752-753) (Ghatage P. 112)
They both/They all laughed.

29

Page #53

Lesson 18 Pronoun-Singular and Plural Non-a. ending Verbs i.e., å, o etc. ending Verbs Singular
Plural Aham/Ham/Ammi: 1
Amhe /Vayam : We both/ We all Tumam/Tum/Tuha : You Tubbhe /Tumhe/Tujjhe : You both/you all So = He (Masculine)
Te: They both (Masculine)/
They all (Masculine) Så - She (Feminine)
Tả/Tảo/Tău - They both (Feminine)/
They all (Feminine)
Intransitive Verbs
Thả = To stay
Ņha = To bathe
Ho : To become
Past Tense Aham
I Thási/Thāhi/Țhähia = I stayed. Ham Ammi) Hosi/Hohi/Hohia
I became.
Tumam Tum
Thāsi/Thảhi/Thāhia
: You stayed.
Hosi/Hobi/Hohia
- You became.
Tuha
So
Thási/Thāhi/Thahia Thasi/Thāhi/Tháhia
- He stayed. : She stayed.
Sá
So
Hosi/Hohi/Hohia Hosi/Hohi/Hohia
- He became. - She became.
Sa
Amhe) Vayam
Thāsi/Thāhi/Thāhia Hosi/Hobi/Hohia
- We both/We all stayed. We both/We all became.
30
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #54

Tubbhe
Thåsi/Thāhi/Thahia Tumhe >
Hosi/Hohi/Hohia Tujjhe
- You both/You all stayed. • You both/You all became.
Thasi/Thahi/Thahia
:They both/They all stayed.
Hosi/Hohi/Hohia
- They both/They all became.
Tá
Thisi/Thàhi/Thahia
Tão Täu
- They both/They all stayed. • They both/They all became.
Hosi/Hohi/Hohia
1. In the First, Second and Third Person Singular and Plural of the
Past Tense. 'si', 'hi', 'hia' suffixes are used in the a-ending, 0-ending etc. Verbs.
2. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
3. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. 4. (i) In Ardhamagadhi, the Past Tense is formed by ading 'ittha'
and 'imsu' suffixes to the a-ending, á-ending, o-ending etc. verbs in all the three Persons and the two Numbers. as, Thāitthă/Thāimsu, Hoitthā/Hoińsu (Pischel. P. 752-753) (Ghātage P. 112) (ii) Besides these, Hotthå - became, Ahamsu = said are also used. (Pischel P. 755) Some other Verbal forms are : First Person Singular Akarissaṁ - did Third Person Singular Akäsi - did (For other Verbal forms, see Pischel P. 751-753)
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
31

Page #55

Lesson 19
Pronoun
First Person Singular Number
Aham/Ham/Ammi : 1 Intransitive Verbs
Hasa - To laugh Rusa = To sulk Jiva =To live
Saya = To sleep Lukka - To hide
Ņacca = To dance Jagga - To wake up
Future Tense
Aham Haṁ Ammi)
Hasihimi/Hasissāmi/Hasihami/Hasissimi/ Hasehimi/Hasessämi/Hasehāmi/ Hasissaṁ/Hasessa
: I shall laugh.
Aham Ham Ammi)
Naccihimi/Naccissåmi/Naccihami/Naccissimi/ Naccehimi/Naccessámi/Naccehami/
I shall dance. Naccissam/Naccessam
Aham Haṁ Ammi
Lukkihimi/Lukkissämi/Lukkihami/Lukkissimi/ Lukkehimi/Lukkessämi/Lukkehāmi/
= I shall hide. Lukkissam/Lukkessam
1. Aham/Ham/Ammi = 1, First Person Singular Number
(Personal Pronoun) 2. (i) In the First Person Singular of the Future Tense 'hi', 'sså', 'ha',
‘ssi', 'ssam' suffixes are used in the verbs. After using 'hi', 'ssá', ‘ssi' and 'hā' suffixes, the First Person Singular suffix 'mi' of the Present Tense is added to the Verbs. 'mi' is not added to 'ssam' suffix of the Future Tense. (ii) in using 'hi', 'ssa', 'ssaṁ' and 'hå' suffixes in the verbs, a of a-ending verbs is changed into 'l' and 'e'. (iii) In using 'ssi' suffix in the verbs, a of a-ending verbs is changed into 'i' only. (Hema. Prāksta Grammar, 4-275)
32
Pråksta Grammar and Composition

Page #56

(iv) The Verb Roccha : To weep. The First Person Singular of *Roccha' in the Future Tense will be Roccham - I shall weep. Besides, Rocchimi, Rocchemi are also formed after droping 'hi' suffix from the Verb Roccha and after adding the suffix 'mi' to it and then a of a-ending Verbs is changed into i and e. Sometimes Rocchihimi etc. are also formed. (Hema. Praksta Grammar 3-172)
The Conjugation of Roccha in the Future Tense will be:
First Person
Singular (i) Roccham (ii) Rocchimi/Rocchemi/ (iii) Rocchihimi/ etc.
Plural (i) Rocchimo/Rocchimu/
Rocchima/Rocchemo/
Rocchemu/Rocchema/ (11) Rocchihimo/etc.
Second Person (i) Rocchisi/ Rocchesi/
(ii) Rocchihisi/etc.
(1) Rocchiha/Rocchidha/
Roccheha/Rocchedha (ii) Rocchihiha
Third Person
(i) Rocchii/Rocchei/ (ii) Rocchihii/etc.
(i) Rocchinti/Rocchintel
Rocchiire! (ii) Rocchihinti/etc.
(v) In Ardhamagadhi, the Conjugation of Roccha in the Future Tense will be: Singular
Plural First Person Rocchami
Rocchămo
Second Person Rocchasi
Rocchaha
Third Person
Rocchai
Rocchanti
3. All the above Verbs are Intransitive. 4. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
33

Page #57

Tumam/Tum/Tuha - You
=
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa - To laugh
=
Rusa To sulk
=
Jiva =To live
Tumaṁ
Tum
Tuha
Tum
Tuha
Lesson 20
Tum
Tuha
34
Pronoun
Tumam Naccihisi/Naccihise/
Naccissasi/Naccissase/ Naccissisi/Naccissise
Second Person Singular Number
Saya
= To sleep
Lukka = To hide
Future Tense
Hasihisi/Hasihise/ Hasissasi/Hasissase/
"Hasissisi/Hasissise
Tumaṁ Lukkihisi/Lukkihise/
Lukkissasi/Lukkissase/ Lukkissisi/Lukkissise

1=1
Nacca = To dance Jagga = To wake up
=
1. (i) Tumam/Tum/Tuha You, Second Person Singular Number (Personal Pronoun)
You will laugh.
- You will dance.
= You will hide.
(ii) In Ardhamāgadhi, Tumam/Tum/Tume are used (Pischel, Grammar of the Präkṛta languages P. 617)
2. (i) In the Second Person Singular of the Future Tense 'hi', 'ssa' and 'ssi' suffixes are added to the Verbs. After adding them, 'si' and 'se' suffixes of the Present Tense Second Person Singular are also added.

Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #58

(ii) After adding 'hi' and 'ssa' suffixes to the verbs, the a of a-ending verbs is changed into 'i' and 'e'. The examples of 'l' are given above. The examples of 'e' will be : 'Hasehisi/Hasehise, Hasessasi/ Hasessase. (iii) After adding 'ssi' suffix to the verbs, the a of a-ending verbs is changed into 'l'. (iv) Pt. Becaradásaji in the Präkrta Margopadeśikā has also mentioned ‘ssa' suffix in the Second Person Singular (P. 249). Pischel has also mentioned 'ssa' suffix in the Second Person Singular. - 'Gamissasi'
(Page 761). 3. All the above Verbs are Intransitive. 4. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
35

Page #59

Lesson 21
Pronoun
So - He (Masculine)
Third Person Singular Number Så = She (Feminine) Intransitive Verbs
Hasa =To laugh Saya - To sleep Ņacca - To dance Rūsa .To sulk Lukka - To hide Jagga - To wake up Jiva = To live
Future Tense
Hasihii/Hasihie/Hasihidi/Hasihidel Hasissai/Hasissae/Hasissadi/Hasissadel Hasissidi/Hasisside
: He will laugh.
Hasihii/Hasihie/Hasihidi/Hasihidel Hasissai/Hasissae/Hasissadi/Hasissade/ Hasissidi/Hasisside
- She will laugh.
Naccihii/Naccihie/Naccihidi/Naccihide/ Naccissai/Naccissae/Naccissadi/Naccissadel = He will dance. Naccissidi/Naccisside
Naccihil/Naccihie/Naccihidi/Naccihide/ Naccissai/Naccissae/Naccissadi/Naccissadel - She will dance, Naccissidi/Naccisside
1. (i) So - He (Masculine)
w ? Third Person Singular Number Sa : She (Feminine)
(Personal Pronoun) (ii) Sa - He (Masculine) is also used. (iii) In Ardhamagadhi, 'se' is also used. (Pischel. P. 625)
36
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #60

2. (i) In the Third Person Singular of the Future Tense ‘hi', 'ssa', 'ssi'
suffixes are added to the Verbs. After adding 'hi', 'ssa' to the Verbs, the suffixes 'l', 'e', 'di', 'de' of the Third Person Singular pertaining to the Present Tense are added. (ii) Sometime, after adding 'hi', 'ssa' suffixes of the Future Tense; the suffix 'ti' is also added. as; Hasthiti, Hasissati (Prakrta Märgopadeśikā, P. 250) (iii) After adding 'hi' and 'ssa' suffixes, the a of a-ending verbs is changed into 'i' and 'e'. Only Verbal forms of 'r' have been mentioned above. (iv) After adding 'ssi' suffix to the verb, only 'di' and 'de' suffixes are added and the a of a-ending verbs is changed into 'i' only. (v) In the Third Person Singular of the Future Tense Pt. Becaradásaji in the Pråksta Mārgopadeśika has also mentioned 'ssa' suffix. (P. 245). Pischel has also mentioned 'ssa' suffix, as (Bhavissadi, Page
755 Marissai, Page 760). 3. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
4. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
37

Page #61

Aham/Ham/Ammi = 1
Tumam/Tum/Tuha - You So He (Masculine)
Så She (Feminine)
Intransitive Verbs
Thȧ = To stay
Aham
Ham
Ammi
Aham
Ham
Ammi
Tumam
Lesson 22
Pronoun- Singular
Non 'a'-ending Verbs i.e., à, o etc. ending Verbs
First Person Singular Second Person Singular
Third Person Singular
Tum
Tuha
Tumam
Tum
Tuha
So
Sā
So
•
38

Nha To bathe
ㄓ
Future Tense
Thāhimi/Thässämi/Thāhāmi
Thassimi/Thassam
Hohimi/Hossami/Hohāmi
Hossimi/Hossam
Thahisi/Thassisi/Thassasi
Hohisi/Hossisi/Hossasi
Thähii/Thahidi/Thassai/
Thassadi/Thassidi
Thähii/Thahidi/Thässai/ Thassadi/Thassidi
Hohii/Hohidi/Hossai/ Hossadi/Hossidi
Ho To become

= I shall stay.
= I shall become.
- You will stay.
You will become.
- He will stay.
She will stay.
= He will become.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #62

Så
Hohii/Hohidi/Hossai/ Hossadi/Hossidi
1. Aham/Ham/Ammi = I
First Person Singular
Tumam/Tum/Tuha You Second Person Singular
Third Person Singular
So He (Masculine)
Så = She (Feminine)
=
= She will become.
2. (i) In the Second Person Singular of the Future Tense the suffix 'se' is used only in a-ending verbs. The suffix 'se' is not used in the ȧending, o-ending etc. verbs.
(ii) Likewise, in the Third Person Singular 'e' and 'de' suffixes are not used. These suffixes (se, e and de) are used only in the a-ending verbs.

Personal
Pronouns
Singular
(iii) In the Third Person Singular of the Future Tense, only the 'di' suffix of the Present Tense is used with 'ssi' suffix.
Präkṛta Grammar and Composition
(iv) In the Second Person and the Third Person Singular of the Future Tense, 'ssa' suffix is mentioned by Pischel P. 760 and Pt. Becaradāsaji (Präkṛta Märgopadeśikā, P. 249)
3. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
4. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.

39

Page #63

Amhe
Vayam
Intransitive Verbs
= We both/We all
Hasa To laugh
=
Rūsa To sulk
=
Jiva = To live
40
Lesson 2 3
1. Amhe
Vayam
Pronoun
}
Hasihimo/Hasihimu/Hasihima/
Amhe
Hasissämo/Hasissämu/Hasissȧma/
Vayam Hasissimo/Hasissimu/Hasissima/ Hasihȧmo/Hasihāmu/Hasihāma
Amhe
Naccihimo/Naccihimu/Naccihima/ Naccissãmo/Naccissamu/Naccissȧma/ Vayam Naccissimo/Naccissimu/Naccissima/ Naccihamo/Naccihamu/Naccihāma
First Person Plural Number
Saya
- To sleep
Lukka To hide
Ambe
Lukkihimo/Lukkihimu/Lukkihima/ Lukkissämo/Lukkissåmu/Lukkissåma/ Vayam Lukkissimo/Lukkissimu/Lukkissima/ Lukkihamo/Lukkihamu/Lukkihäma

Future Tense
= We both/We all
Nacca = To dance
Jagga
=
=
=

- To wake up
We both shall laugh.
We all shall laugh.
We both shall dance.
We all shall dance.
2. (i) In the First Person Plural of the Future Tense 'hà, ‘hi', ‘ssà', 'ssi' suffixes are added to the Verbs. After adding these, First Person Plural suffixes, mo, mu and ma of the Present Tense are added.
We both shall hide.
We all shall hide.
First Person Plural Number (Personal Pronoun)
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #64

(ii) After adding 'ha', 'hi', 'ssä' suffixes to the Verbs, the a of aending Verbs is changed into 'i' and 'e'. (Here only Verbal forms of 'i' are mentioned). (iii) After adding 'ssi' suffix to the Verbs, the a of 'a'- ending Verbs is changed into 'l'. (iv) The complete suffixes 'hissă' and 'hittha' are added exclusively:- 'Hasihissà' and 'Hasihittha'.
3. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
4. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #65

Lesson 24
Pronoun
Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
You both/You all
Second Person Plural Number
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa =To laugh Rusa = To sulk Jiva = To live
Saya = To sleep Lukka = To hide
Ņacca = To dance Jagga = To wake up
Future Tense
Tubbhe Hasihiha/Hasihidha/Hasihittha/ Tumhe > Hasissaha/Hasissadha/Hasissaitthal = Tujjhe ) Hasissiha/ Hasissidha/Hasissiittha
You both will laugh. You all will laugh.
Tubbhe Naccihiha/Naccihidha/Naccihitthal
You both will dance. Tumhe > Naccissaha/Naccissadha/Naccissaitthäl
You all will dance. Tujjhe Naccissiha/Naccissidha/Naccissiittha
Lukkihiha/Lukkihidha/Lukkihittha/
You both will hide. Tumhe > Lukkissaha/Lukkissadha/Lukkissaitthå/
You all will hide. Tujjhe ) Lukkissiha/Lukkissidha/Lukkissiitthā
1. Tubbhe
Tumhe You both/You all Second Person Plural Number Tujjhe )
(Personal Pronoun) 2. (i) in the Second Person Plural of the Future Tense, 'hi', 'ssa',
'ssi'suffixes are added to the Verbs, After this, the Second Person
42
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #66

Plural suffixes, ha, dha, ittha of the Present Tense are also added. (ii) After adding 'hi', 'ssa' suffixes to the Verbs the a of a-ending Verbs is changed into 'I' and 'e' (Here only Verbal forms of 'I' are mentioned).
(iii) On adding 'ssi' suffix to the Verbs the a of a-ending Verbs is changed into 'I'.
(iv) Pischel has mentioned the use of 'ssa' suffix :
Bhanissaha, Bhanissadha. (Grammar of the Prākṛta languages P. 772) Pt. Becaradasaji has also mentioned this (P. 249)
3. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
4. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

43

Page #67

Lesson 25
Pronoun
Third
Te - They both (Masculinel/They all (Masculine) Tá/Tão/Tàu : They both (Feminine)/They all (Feminine)
Person Plural
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa =To laugh Rusa =To sulk Jiva = To live
Saya = To sleep Ņacca = To dance Lukka - To hide Jagga = To wake up
Future Tense
Hasihinti/Hasihinte/Hasihiire/
>
Hasissanti/Hasissante/Hasissaire/ Hasissinti/Hasissinte/Hasissiire
They both will laugh. They all will laugh.
Tä ) Tào Tau)
Hasihinti/Hasihinte/Hasihiire/ Hasissanti/Hasissante/Hasissaire/ Hasissinti/Hasissinte/Hasissiire
They both will laugh. They all will laugh.
Te
Naccihinti/Naccihinte/Naccihiirel Naccissanti/Naccissante/Naccissaire/ Naccissinti/Naccissinte/Naccissiire
They both will dance. They all will dance.
Tá Tin Täu)
Naccihinti/Naccihinte/Naccihiire/ Naccissanti/Naccissante/Naccissaire! Naccissinti/Naccissinte/Naccissiire
. They both will dance.
They all will dance.
Third Person 1. Te: They both (Masculine)/They all (Masculine)
Plural (Personal Tå/Tão/Täu - They both (Feminine)/They all (Feminine)
9 Pronoun) 2. (i) in the Third Person Plural of the Future Tense, 'hi', 'ssa',
'ssi'suffixes are added to the Verbs, After adding these, the Third
44
Prāksta Grammar and Composition

Page #68

Person Plural suffixes nti, nte and ire of the Present Tense are added. (ii) On adding 'hi', 'ssa' suffixes to the Verbs the a of a-ending Verbs is changed into 'l' and 'e'. (Here only Verbal forms of 'i' are mentioned). (iii) On adding 'ssi' suffix to the Verbs the a of a-ending Verbs is changed into 'r'. (iv) Pischel has mentioned the use of 'ssa' suffix : Karissanti (Grammar of the Práksta languages P. 770) Pt. Becaradásaji has also mentioned this (P. 249)
3. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
4. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
45

Page #69

Lesson 26
Pronoun- Plural
Non-'a'-ending Verbs i.e., å, o etc. ending Verbs
First Person Plural
Amhe
Vayam
Tubbhe
Tumhe
Tujjhe
}
- We both/We all
Amhe
Vayam
=
46
Te They both (Masculine)/They all (Masculine)
=
Ta/Tão/Tau They both (Feminine)/They all (Feminine)
You both/You all
Intransitive Verbs
Thȧ = To stay
=
Thȧhimo/Thāhimu/Thāhima/ Thassȧmo/Thässämu/Thassāma/
Amhe
Vayam Thassimo/Thassimu/Thassima/ Thahȧmo/Thāhāmu/Thāhāma
Nha To bathe
=

Future Tense
Hohimo/Hohimu/Hohima/
Hossamo/Hossämu/Hossȧma/
Hossimo/Hossimu/Hossima/
Hohamo/Hohämu/Hohama
Tubbhe Thahiha/Thāhidha/Thāhittha/ Thassaha/Thassadha/Thassaitthȧ/
Tumhe
Tujjhe Thassiha/Thässidha/Thāssiitthå
=
=
=
Second Person

Plural
Third
Person
Plural
Ho To become
We both shall stay.
We all shall stay.
We both shall become.
We all shall become.
You both shall stay.
You all shall stay.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #70

Tubbhe Tumhe Tujihe
Hohiha/Hohidha/Hohittha/ Hossaha/Hossadha/Hossaitthä/ Hossiha/Hossidha/Hossiitthả
You both shall become. You all shall become.
Te
Tháhinti/Tháhinte/Tháhire or Tháhiire! They both(Mas.) will stay Thassnti/Thassnte/Thassaire/
They all (Mas.) will stay Thâssinti/Thảssinte/Thâssiire
They both(fem.) will stay They all(fem.) will stay
Tå/Tão/Täu
Hohinti/Hohinte/Hohire or Hohiire/ They both(Mas.) will become Hossanti/Hossante/Hossaire/
They all (Mas.) will become Hossinti/Hossinte/Hossiire
They both(Fem.) will become They all (Fem.) will become
Tä/Täo/Tău
1. Amhe
Vayam
We both/We all
First Person Plural
Tubbhe Tumhe Tujjhe
: You both/You all
Second Person Plural
Personal Pronouns Plural
on #
Te : They both (Masculinel/They all (Masculine)
Third Person Ta/Tảo/Tẩu - They both (Feminine)/
Plural They all (Feminine) All the above Verbs are Intransitive. 3. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
Suffixes of the Future Tense (Lesson 19 to 26) Singular
Plural First Person hỉ, ssả, ssi, hả hê, ssẵ, ssi, hả
ssaṁ (complete suffix) hissä, hittha (complete suffix) Second Person hi, ssa, ssi hi, ssa, ssi Third Person hi, ssa, ssi
hi, ssa, ssi
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
47

For.Private & Personal Use Only

Page #71

Note: In the Second Person and the Third Person of the Future Tense,
'ssa' suffix is mentioned by Pischel P. 770 and Pt. Becaradásaji (Präkrta Margopadeśikā, P. 249) 'ssi' (Hema. Prakrta Grammar
4-275). 5.(i) In both Numbers (Singular and Plural) and three Persons (Fisrt,
Second and Third) of the a-ending verbs in the Future Tense “jja', “jja' suffixes are used. In using “jja', 'jja' suffixes a of aending verbs is changed into 'e' and 'l'. (Hema. Práksta Grammar 3-157, 3-177)
Aham/Ham/Ammi Amhel Vayam Tumam/Tum/Tuha Tubbhe/Tumhe/Tujjhe So
= I shall laugh. - We shall laugh.
- You will laugh. Hasejja/ Hasejja - Yau all will laugh. Hasijja/Hasijja - He will laugh.
= She will laugh. = They (all) will laugh. - They (all) will laugh.
Те
Tå/Tão/Tàu
(ii)
(iii)
In both Numbers of three Persons of the a-ending, o-ending etc. verbs in the Future Tense, jja, jjă suffixes are also used. Ho + jja, jjå - Hojja/Hojja After adding 'a'to the a-ending, o-ending etc. verbs, jja, jjă suffixes are also added. In adding these suffixes, added 'a' is changed into 'e' and 'l' like the a of a-ending verbs. Tha + a = Thãa - Thãejja/Thãejja/Thäljja/Tháijja Ho+a Hoa - Hoejja/Hoejja/Hoijja/Hoijjā Nhả + a - Nhậa-Nhaejja/Nhaejja/Nhaijja/Nhäljja
48
Präksta Grammar and Composition

Page #72

1.
2.
Exercises
Use the following Intransitive Verbs in the Active Voice. This use should be in the Present Tense, Imperative, Past Tense and the Future Tense. Make use of the Personal Pronoun as the Subject.
Lajja = To embarrass
Ruva = To weep
Dara = To fear
Kalaha = To quarrel
Thakka To tire
Accha To sit
-
Lesson 27
Intransitive Verbs
Pada = To fall
Uttha To get up
Taḍaphaḍa: To flounder
W
Ghuma To go round
=
Nisara = To come out
Rucca To shine, To glitter
=
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Ucchala To leap
Ujjama = To endeavour
Ullasa = To rejoice
==
Kampa = To tremble
Mara: To die
Khela = To play Kulla To jump
=
Jujjha To fight
Muccha = To faint
Uttara = To come down
=
Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta -
(1) We hide/shall hide. (2) He feared/fears. (3) You should get up will get up. (4) They all will get up/all get up. (5) I played/shall play. (6) She rejoices/will rejoice. (7) They should rejoice. (8) He woke up/will wake up/wakes up. (9) You all should live/will live. (10) I tire. (11) He stayed/will stay/ stays. (12) You may bathe/will bathe. (13) We faint. (14) He may fall/fell/will fall. (15) They will embarrass/embarrass. (16) You should endeavour. (17) She will die/dies. (18) He weeps/will weep. (19) You may sit. (20) They quarrelled/will
Thambha To stop, To halt
Kidda = To play

49

Page #73

quarrel. (21) We shall play/played. (22) I get up/ shall get up/got up. (23) He goes round/will go round/may go round/ went round. Correct the following sentences of the Present Tense in two ways. (i) Make use of the correct Verbal form in agreement with the Pronoun. (ii) Make use of the correct Pronominal form in agreement with the Verbal form. (1) Aham Lukkasi. (2) Tumaṁ Naccami. (3) So Hasesi. (4) Amhe Hasadi. (5) Tumhe Thakkanti. (6) Te Lajjamo. (7) Tá Padadha. (8) Tubbhe Ghumanti. (9) Vayam Thải. (10) Te Marai. (11) So Khelanti. (12) Tuha Padittha. (13) Tujjhe Ucchalade. (14) Ham Kampasi. (15) Ammi Kullanti. (16) Tuha Mucchei.(17) Tumhe Nhămu.(18) Amhe Hosi. (19) Tă Utthai, (20) Tuha Marante. Correct the following sentences of the Imperative in two ways. (i) Make use of the correct Verbal form in agreement with the Pronoun. (ii) Make use of the correct Pronominal form in agreement with the Verbal form. (1) Ham Padau.(2) Tuha Ruvamo. (3) So Thakkadhi. (4) Amhe Darantu. (5) Tumhe Kampamu. (6) Tum Mucchadu. (7) Så Kullaha. (8) Aham Jujjhentu. (9) Tubbhe Darāmo. (10) HamTadaphada. (11) Te Acchau. (12) So Utthaha. (13) Tá Kheladha. (14) Ham Nhadhi. (15) Tumaṁ Kulladu. (16) Te Ruvau. (17) Ammi Ullasa. (18) So Kalahasu. (19) Tubbhe Acchejjasu. (20) Ammi Lajjase. Correct the following sentences of the Future Tense in two ways. (i) Make use of the correct Verbal form in agreement with the Pronoun.
5.
50
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

-

Page #74

6.
(ii) Make use of the correct Pronominal form in agreement with the Verbal form.
7.
(1) Tuha Utthissam. (2) Ham Paḍihisi. (3) Sa Kampihimi. (4) Aham Lajjissimo. (5) Tum Hasihiha. (6) Tumhe Darihimu. (7) Amhe Khelissadha. (8) Tubbhe Mucchissade. (9) Ta Nhahidi. (10) Tuha Marihima. (11) Tum Kullissimo. (12) Ammi Jujjhissaitthä. (13) Ham Khelihiha (14) Tão Nhāhidha. (15) Täu Ujjamihidha. (16) Vayam Jaggissiha. (17) So Rūsissiire. (18) Te Nhahimi. (19) Tujjhe Mucchihinti. (20) Ham Ghumissimu.
Fill each blank in the following sentences with an appropriate Personal Pronoun.
............... Thakkami.
(1)
(3). ...........Padamu.
(5)...........
(7).
(9)
(11)
(13)
(15)
(17)
(19)
(21)
(23)
(25).
(27)..
..Kalahase.
Acchadha.
.Thambhamu.
Jujjhadu.
..Kampasi.
.Ucchalae.

Lajjia.
.Marihimi.
..Jujjhisside.
..Jaggissadha.
..Thāhidha.
..Ullasa.
(2)
(4)
(6)
(8)
(10)
(12)
(14)
(16)
(18)
(20)
(22)
(24)
(26)
(28).
Daramo.

..Uttha.
.Ghumaha.
Mucchahi.
.Kullau.
.Ujjamantu.
Ullasei.
(29)..............Jaggahi.
(30)........... .Sayantu.
Fill each blank in the following sentences as directed.
(1) Ham
(Kulla - in the Present Tense)
(2) Amhe
(Khela in the Future Tense)
Prākṛta Grammar and Composition
..Nhādi.
..Nhāhi.
.Khelissisi.
.Utthihimo.
..Mucchihinti.
...Lajjissaitthā.
.Ujjamejjasu.
51

Page #75

52
(3) Tumhe
(4) Aham
(5) Tubbhe
(6) Tujjhe
(7) Sä
(8) Ammi
(9) Aham
(10) Te

(Uttha in the Imperative)
(Accha in the Past Tense)
(Ruva - in the Imperative)
(Muccha - in the Future Tense)
(Lajja - in the Future Tense)
(Dara - in the Past Tense)
(Ullasa - in the Present Tense) (Jujjha - in the Future Tense).
-
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #76

Lesson 28
Absolutive (An action completed at some past time) Intransitive Verbs
Hasa - To laugh Ņacca - To dance
Hasa
Nacca
Suffixes of the Absolutive uņa/ūņam
dūņa/dūņa
a/ya
Hasiūņa/Hasiūņam Ņacciūna/Nacciūnań Having laughed Having danced Hasidūņa/Hasidūņań Naccidūņa/Ņaccidūņań Having laughed Having danced Hasia/Hasiya Naccia/Nacciya Having laughed Having danced Hasium
Naccium Having laughed Having danced Hasitta
Naccittà Having laughed Having danced
um
ttä
The use in sentences
Aham
Haṁ Ammi
Tumam Tum Tuha
Hasiūna/Hasiduna/Hasia
Jivami/ Jivami/ Jivemi Hasium/Hasitta
= Having laughed, I live. Hasiūņa/Hasidūņa/Hasia
Jivahi/Jivasu etc. Hasium/Hasitta
- Having laughed, you should live. Hasiuņa/Hasidūņa/Hasia Hasiuṁ/Hasițţă
Jivihii/ Jivihie etc. • Having laughed, he/she will live.
So
Så
}
Praksta Grammar and Composition
53

Page #77

Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta by using the suffixes of the Absolutive:
(1) Having wept, he sleeps. (3) Having tired, they sit. (5) Having danced, they hided.
(2) Having tired, you all should sit. (4) Having laughed, we shall live. (6) Having fallen, you all get up.
(8) Having got up, we shall rejoice.
(7) Having feared, they tremble. (9) Having endeavoured, I rejoice. (10) Having fought, you die.
1.
2.
3. (i)
(ii)
54
In Prakrta when an Adjective or an Indeclinable is formed by adding a suffix to the verb, it is called a Participle. The Participle is either Declinable or Indeclinable. The Absolutive and Infinitive Participles are Indeclinable and the Present, Past and Obligatory and Potential Participles are Declinable. In other words, the Particplies are also called Verbal constructions resulting in words which are either Adjectives or Indeclinables.
For expressing the purport of 'having laughed', 'having slept', 'having waken up' the above-mentioned suffixes are used in Pråkrta. After adding the above suffixes to the Verbs, the words so formed are known as Absolutives. When the Subject, after completing one action, does the other, the Absolutive is used for the prior action completed. Here the Absolutive-signifying word and the simple Verb, both are related to the Subject. (having laughed, he sleeps). Here 'laughed' and 'sleeps' are related to the Subject 'he'. The Absolutives are Indeclinable. Therefore, there is no inflection in them.
On adding the above suffixes, ūņa/dūņa etc. the a of a-ending Verbs is changed into 'I' and 'e' as,
Hasiūna/Haseūņa/Hasidūṇa/Hasedūņa (In the above examples only Verbal forms of 'I' are mentioned)
On adding the above suffixes in a-ending and o-ending Verbs like Tha and Ho, the following Verbal forms are constructed :
Thäuṇa/Thȧdūņa
Hoūņa/Hodūņa

Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #78

456
4.
5.
6.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
All the above sentences are in the Intransitive Verbs.
All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
In Ardhamăgadhi, for constructing the Absolutives, the suffixes (i) ttāna/ttāņaṁ (ii) ǎya (iii) ǎe (iv) yāṇa/yāṇaṁ. (v) ttu are added to the Verbs.
On adding ttāṇa/ttānam, the a-of a-ending verbs, is changed into 'i' and 'e' as;
Hasittäṇa/Hasittāṇaṁ
aya - Hasaya = Having laughed.
äe - Hasäe = Having laughed.
Having laughed
yāṇa/yāṇaṁ - Hasiyaṇa/Hasiyāṇaṁ = Having laughed (the a of a-ending verbs is changed into 'I')
ttu - Hasittu/Hasettu Having laughed (the a of a-ending verbs is changed into 'I' and 'e') (Ghatage, Page 131)
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

55

Page #79

Lesson 29
Infinitive
Verbs
Hasa : To laugh
Nacca - To dance
Nacca
Suffixes of the Hasa Infinitive um
Hasium - For laughing
or to laugh dum
Hasidum - For laughing
or to laugh
Ņaccium : For dancing
or to dance Ņaccidum - For dancing
or to dance
The use in sentences
Hasium /Hasidum
Jivami/Jivami etc.
- I live for laughing.
Aham Ham Ammi Tumam Tum Tuha
Hasium /Hasidus
Jivahi/Jivasu etc.
- You should live to laugh.
Hasium /Hasidus
Sa
Jivihil/Jivihie
- He/She will live to laugh.
Translate the following sentences into Prákşta by using Infinitive suffixes: (1) He dances to tire. (2) She falls to sit. (3) They hide to fight. (4) You all should endeavour for getting up. (5) They should tire to sleep. (6) He should endeavour to wake up. (7) They will get up to dance. (8) I got up to Jump. (9) You will play for rejoicing. (10) He wept for sleeping.
1.
In Prákyta when an Adjective or an Indeclinable is formed by adding a suffix to the verb, it is called a Participle. The Participle
56
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #80

is either Declinable or Indeclinable. The Absolutive and Infinitive Participles are Indeclinable and the Present, Past and Obligatory and Potential Participles are Declinable. In other words, the Particplies are also called Verbal constructions resulting in words which are either Adjectives or Indeclinables. For expressing the purport of 'for laughing', or 'to laugh' 'for dacing' or 'to dance', 'for living' or 'to live' etc., the abovementioned suffixes are used in Prakrta. The words which are formed by adding these suffixes to the Verbs are called Infinitives. These words are Indeclinable. Therefore, these are not inflected. By adding the above suffixes 'um'/duṁ to the Verbs, the a of a-ending verbs is changed into 'i', and 'e' as; Hasium/ Hasidur Haseur/Hasedum On adding the above suffixes to 'ho' and 'thā', the Verbal constructions are : Houm/Hoduṁ Tháum/Thádum All the above-mentioned suffixes have been used in the Intransitive Verbs. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. In Ardhamågadhi, 'ttae' suffix is added to the verbs. On adding this suffix to the verbs, the a of a-ending Verbs is changed into 'i' and 'e'. This change does not occur in the a-ending and oending verbs etc. Only ttae suffix is added to them, as, Hasa + ttae : Hasittae/Hasettae Ho + ttae : Hottae
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
57

Page #81

Lesson 30 Nouns and Verbs
(1) a-ending Nouns (Masculine)
Karaha - Camel
Rayaņa - Jewel Kukkura - Dog
Sayara : Ocean Gantha - Book
Raya - Monarch Vayasa - Crow
Narinda - King Putta - Son
Balaa - Child Potta - Grandson
Avayasa - Dishonour,
Disgrace Ghara - House
Haņuvanta - Hanumana Maula - Maternal Uncle Gavva - Pride Piamaha : Paternal Grandfather Huavaha - Fire Sasura - Father-in-law
Marua = Wind Diara - Husband's younger brother Pada - Cloth Nara - Human being
Kayanta - Death Paramesara - God
Divayara - Sun Rahuņandaņa - Råma
Rakkhasa : Demon Vaya = Vow
Siha - Lion Agama - Scripture
Dukkha = Suffering Sappa = Serpent
Mitta -Friend Bhava - World
Duha - Grief Küva - Well
Bappa : Father Meha - Cloud
Salila - Water Kara - Hand
Gama - Village Saṁjama - Restraint
58
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #82

(2) Intransitive Verbs
Khaya : To end, To disappear Soha : To shine Jala - To burn
Sukka - To dry up, To dry Ho : To become, To exist Dula - To move about Hu = To become, To exist Dukkha = To ache Uppajja = To emanate
Pala - To run away Vala : To turn
Cittha - To sit Jara - To grow old
Bukka - To bark Gajja = To roar, To thunder Tutta - To break Uga : To rise, To sprout, To grow Kanda = To weep Uờda = To fly
Harisa - To rejoice Ņassa = To disappear
Ņijjhara : To trickle, To drop, Gala - To vanish
To drip Ludha : To fall down,
Pasara : To spread To tumble down
All the above Nouns are a-ending Masculine. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
2.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
59

Page #83

Lesson 31 a-ending Nouns (Masculine)
Nominative Singular Narinda - King
Balaa - Child
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa - To laugh
Jagga = To wake up
Nominative Case Present Tense (Singular)
(Singular) Narindo Hasai/Hasei/Hasael
Hasadi/Hasedi/Hasade
The king laughs.
Balao
Jaggai/Jaggei/Jaggael. Jaggadi/Jaggedi/Jaggade
The child wakes up.
Nominative Case Imperative (Singular)
(Singular) Narindo Hasau/Haseu/
Hasadu/Hasedu
- The king should laugh.
Balao
Jaggau/Jaggeu/ Jaggadu/Jaggedu
- The child should wake up.
Nominative Case (Singular) Narindo
Past Tense (Singular)
Hasia
- The king laughed.
Balao
Jaggia
- The child woke up.
60
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #84

Nominative Case Future Tense (Singular)
(Singular) Hasihii/Hasihie/Hasthidi/Hasihidel Narindo Hasissai/Hasissae/Hasissadi/Hasissadel
Hasissidi/Hasisside
The king will laugh.
Balao
Jaggihii/Jagginie/Jaggihidi/Jaggihide
The child will Jaggissai/Jaggissae / Jaggissadi/Jaggissadel?
wake up. Jaggissidi/Jaggisside
3.
A
1. Narindo - Nominative Case Singular (a-ending Masculine) 2. In the a-ending Masculine, 'Narinda' etc. 'o' suffix is used in the
Nominative Case Singular. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. In the Active Voice,
Subject (Person, Thing etc.) is used in the Nominative Case. 4. All the above-mentioned Verbs are intransitive. 5. The Verbal form which is used with the above-mentioned Nouns is
of the 'Third Person Singular Number'. 6. With Nouns used in the Nominative Case, the verb used is of the
“Third Person Pronoun'. Here Noun is in the Singular Number,
therefore, Verb is also of the Singular Number. 7. In Ardhamagadhi, 'e' suffix is used in the Nominative Case Singular of the a-ending Masculine Nouns; as;
Narinda-Narinde.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
61

Page #85

62
Narinda King
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa To laugh
HT
Nominative Case
(Plural)
Narinda
Bålaȧ
Narinda
Lesson 32
a-ending Nouns (Masculine)
Nominative Plural
Bälaå
Nominative Case
(Plural)
Narindā
Bålaä

Hasanti/Hasenti/
Hasante/Hasire
Jagganti/Jaggenti/ Jaggante/Jaggire
Nominative Case
(Plural)
Present Tense
(Plural)
Hasantu/Hasentu
Hasia
Imperative
(Plural)
Jaggia
=
Past Tense
(Plural)
=
Bålaa = Child
Jaggantu/Jaggentu = Children may wake up.
Jagga = To wake up
Kings laugh.
Children wake up.
= Kings may laugh.
=
Kings laughed.
= Children woke up.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #86

Nominative Case
(Plural)
Narindă
Bālaä
Future Tense
(Plural)
Hasihinti/Hasihinte/Hasihiire/
Hasissanti/Hasissante/Hasissaire/
Hasissinti/Hasissinte/Hasissiire
Jaggihinti/Jaggihinte/Jaggihiire/ Jaggissanti/Jaggissante/Jaggissaire/ Jaggissinti/Jaggissinte/Jaggissiire

}
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
}
1. Narinda Nominative Case Plural (a-ending Masculine)
2. In the a-ending Masculine Noun 'Narinda' etc. 0Πsuffix is used in the Nominative Case Plural.
= Kings will laugh.
3. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. In the Active Voice, Subject (Person, Thing etc.) is used in the Nominative Case.
4. All the above-mentioned Verbs are Intransitive.
5. The Verbal form which is used with the above-mentioned Nouns is of the 'Third Person Plural Number'.

-Children will wake up.
6. With Nouns used in the Nominative Case, the verb used is of the 'Third Person Pronoun'. Here Noun is in the Plural Number, therefore, Verb is also of the Plural Number.
63

Page #87

1.
Lesson 33
Exercises Translate the following sentences into Prāksta :(A). (1) Clouds thunder. (2) The cloth dries. (3) The jewel shines. (4) Disgrace spreads. (5) Fire burns. (6) The father gets up. (7) The book vanishes. (8) The friend endeavours. (9) Raghunandana (Rama) rejoices. (10) The dog barks. (11) The son trembles. (12) The house falls. (13) Human beings (men) grow old. (14) Pride vanishes. (15) The grandfather tires. (16) Vows shine. (17) Camels dance. (18) The sun rises. (19) Demons fear. (20) Lions sit. (21) The hand aches. (22) The crow flies. (B). - (1) The maternal uncle should get up. (2) The grandson should leap/leapt. (3) Pride should disappear. (4) Children should play. (5) Demons should die/died. (6) Suffering should vanish. (7) Religious books should shine. (8) The friend should rejoice! rejoiced. (9) The ocean may spread/spreads. (10) The son should live. (11) The father bathed. (C)(1) Fire will burn. (2) Religious books will shine. (3) Serpents will fly. (4) Raghunandana will rejoice. (5) The world will vanish. (6) Demons will faint. (7) The child will sulk. (8) Human beings will endeavour. (9) Houses will fall. (10) The well will dry up. Correct the following sentences of the Present Tense in two ways. (i) Make use of the correct Verbal form in agreement with the Pronoun. (ii) Make use of the correct Pronominal form in agreement with the Verbal form.
1.
2.
(1) Kukkuro Bukkanti. (2) Gantho Nassante. (3) Naro Kandanti.
- 64
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #88

..
.....
(4) Dukkho Tuttanti. (5) Karaho Thakkanti. (6) Măulo Thakkire. Correct the following sentences of the Imperative in two ways. (i) Make use of the correct Verbal form in agreement with the Pronoun. (ii) Make use of the correct Pronominal form in agreement with the Verbal form. (1) Sasuro Utthantu. (2) Diaro Naccantu. (3) Paramesaro Harisentu. (4) Haņuvanto Citthantu. (5) Siho Palantu. (6) Kayanto Hontu. Fill each blank in the following sentences as directed (Put the Verbal form according to the Subject). (1) Meha
. (Pasara - in the Future Tense) (2) Kūvá
.... (Sukka - in the Future Tense) (3) Duho ................
(Nassa - in the Imperative) (4) Putto
... (Jagga - in the Present Tense) (5) Gharo
(Pada - in the Past Tense) (6) Huavaho
(Jala - in the Future Tense) (7) Agama .................. (Soha - in the Present Tense) (8) Bhavo ................... (Khaya - in the Future (9) Bappo
................. (Ujjama - in the Imperative) (10) Rakkhaso .................... (Jujjha - in the Future Tense) Translate the following sentences into Prákşta :(A). (1) Having feared, the dog weeps/wept. (2) Having laughed, the father lives. (3) Having rejoiced, the king gets up/got up. (4) Having feared, the serpents run away. (5) Having sulked, the father-in-law sits. (6) Having fallen, the jewel breaks/broke. (7) Having waken up, the father gets up.
5.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
65

Page #89

(B). (1) The father should live for laughing. (2) The grandson should get up for dancing. (3) Fire may burn to disappear. (4) The grandfather should get up to go round. (5) Water should trickle for drying up. (6) The friend should play for rejocing (7) The sun should rise for shining.
(C).
(1) Having quarrelled, the son will embarrass. (2) The friend will live to rejoice. (3) The camel will dance to tire. (4) Having fallen, the house will end. (5) Having broken, the vow will vanish. (6) Demons will jump for dying. (7) Having spread, the water will dry up.
66
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #90

(1). a-ending Nouns (Neuter Gender)
Vimāņa = Aircraft
Patta Paper
Săsaṇa Sokkha Pleasure
=
=
=
=
=
Rajja Kingdom, State Poṭṭala = Small bundle Naha - Sky
=
Sila Moral conduct
Nayarajaṇa Citizen
Khira = Milk
Chikka Sneeze
Lakkuḍa Stick, wood
Udaga Water
Gāņa = Song
Bhaya = Fear
Veragga - Detachment
Sacca = Truth
Ratta Blood
=
=

Government
=
=
Marana Khetta Field
Dhanna = Rice
Dhana Wealth Chāyaṇa Roof
Lesson 34
Nouns and Verbs
=
Death
=
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
Majja = Wine Puppha Flower Vasana = Addiction Jua Gambling
Asana Food
Tiņa = Grass
Vana
Vattha Cloth
Kattha = Wood
Bhoyana Food Ghaya
Sira : Head
Sutta Thread
Suha Pleasure Rina
= Debt
Bia = Seed
Jivana = Life
Rúva Beauty
= Forest
=
=
=

=
Kamma = Action
Jovvana Youth Nana Knowledge
Mana - Mind
Jujjha = Fight
=
Clarified butter
=
67

Page #91

(2). Intransitive Verbs
889
Vaddha To increase
=
68
Viasa =
To bloom, To blossom
Loṭṭa = To sleep, To roll about Cua To drop
=
Jagara To wake up
Khijja To grieve
=
Hava To become
Ucchaha To enthuse
=
Kidda To play
Ciräva = To delay
Kudda
To jump
Vasa = To reside
Tava To shine like flame,
To mortify

Cettha To endeavour
=
1. All the above Nouns are a-endi, g Neuter.
2. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
Guñja = To roar
Sijjha To succeed Phulla To bloom
=
Vijja To exist Chutta To separate
=
Rama = To wander happily
Cukka = To mistake
Kila To sport
-
Phura = To appear Jamma = To appear,
To emerge
=
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #92

Lesson 35 a-ending Nouns (Neuter)
Nominative Singular Kamala - Lotus flower Dhaņa - Wealth Intransitive Verbs
Viasa - To blossom, To bloom Vaddha : To increase
Nominative Case (Singular)
Present Tense (Singular)
Kamalam
The lotus flower
Viasai/Viasei/Viasae/ Viasadi/Viasedi/Viasade
blossoms.
Dhanam
Vaddhai/Vaddhei/Vaddhael Vaddhadi/Vaddhedi/Vaddhade
Wealth increases.
Nominative Case
Imperative (Singular)
(Singular)
Kamalam
Viasau/Viaseul Viasadu/Viasedu
The lotus flower may blossom.
Dhanam
Vaddhau/Vaddheu/
Wealth
Vaddhadu/Vaddhedu
may increase.
Nominative Case
(Singualr) Kamalam
Past Tense (Singular) Viasia
-The lotus flower bloomed.
Dhanam
Vaddhia
= Wealth increased.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
69

Page #93

Nominative Case
(Singular)
Kamalam
Dhanam
Future Tense
(Singular)
Viasihii/Viasihie/Viasihidi/Viasihide/ Viasissai/Viasissae/Viasissadi/
Viasissade/ Viasissidi/Viasisside
Vaddhissade/ Vaddhissidi/Vaddhisside
70
Vaddhihii/Vaddhihie/Vaddhihidi/Vaddhihide/ Vaddhissai/Vaddhissae/Vaddhissadi/
=
1. Kamalam = Nominative Case Singular (a-ending Neuter)
2. In the a-ending Neuter, 'Kamala' etc. Nominative Case Singular.
•
The lotus flower
will blossom.

Wealth
= will
3. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. In the Active Voice, Subject (Person, Thing etc.) is used in the Nominative Case.
4. All the above-mentioned Verbs are Intransitive.

increase.
5. The Verbal form which is used with the above-mentioned Nouns is of the "Third Person Singular Number'.
suffix is used in the
6. With Nouns used in the Nominative Case, the verb used is of the 'Third Person Pronoun'. Here Noun is in the Singular Number, therefore, Verb is also of the Singualr Number.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #94

Lesson 36 a-ending Nouns (Neuter)
Nominative Plural Kamala - Lotus flower Dhaņa - Wealth Intransitive Verbs
Viasa = To blossom, To bloom Vaddha = To increase
Present Tense (Plural Number)
Nominative Case (Plural Number) Kamalälm Kamalai Kamalānis
Viasanti/Viasante/ Viasenti/Viasire
Lotus flowers blossom.
Dhaņaim Dhaņaiń Dhaņāņi
Vaddhanti/Vaddhantel Vaddhenti/Vaddhire
- Wealths increase.
Imperative (Plural Number)
Nominative Case (Plural Number) Kamalaiṁ Kamalaiṁ Kamalaņi
Viasantu/Viasentu
- Lotus flowers may blossom.
Dhaņálí Dhaņaiṁ Dhaņāņi
Vaddhantu/Vaddhentu = Wealths may
increase.
Nominative Case (Plural Number)
Past Tense (Plural Number)
Kamaläim Kamalaiń Kamalani
Viasia
- Lotus flowers bloomed.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
71

Page #95

Dhaņaim) Dhaņaiń Dhaņāņi)
Vaddhia
= Wealths increased
Nominative Case (Plural Number)
Future Tense (Plural Number)
Kamalain) Kamaläin ? Kamalani )
Viasihinti/Viasihinte/Viasihiire/ Viasissanti/Viasissante/Viasissaire/ Viasissinti/Viasissinte/Viasissiire
Lotus flowers will blossom
).
Wealths will
Dhaņaim Dhaņaiń Dhaņāņi
Vaddhihinti/Vaddhihinte/Vaddhihiire/ Vaddhissanti/Vaddhissante/Vaddhissaire/ Vaddhissinti/Vaddhissinte/Vaddhissiire
increase.
1. Kamaläim/Kamalaiṁ/Kamalaņi: Nominative Case Plural
(a-ending Neuter) 2. In the a-ending Neuter, “Kamala' etc. iṁ -áim, in -aiṁ, ņi -aņi
suffixes are used in the Nominative Case Plural. 3. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. In the Active Voice,
Subject (Person, Thing etc.) is used in the Nominative Case. 4. All the above-mentioned Verbs are Intransitive. 5. The Verbal form which is used with the above-mentioned Nouns is
of the 'Third Person Plural Number'. 6. With Nouns used in the Nominative Case, the verb used is of the
“Third Person Pronoun'. Here Noun is in the Plural Number, therefore, Verb is also of the Plural Number.
72
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #96

2.
Lesson 3 7
Exercises
Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta :
..
(A) (1) Pleasure increases. (2) Milk drops. (3) Citizens rejoice. (4) The small bundle falls down. (5) Youth blossoms. (6) The sky thunders. (7) Moral conduct appears. (8) Grass burns. (9) The debt increases.
(B) (1) Detachment should increase. (2) Suffering should vanish. (3) The state should endeavour. (4) Knowledge should succeed. (5) The government should fear. (6) Moral conduct should shine. (7) Wealth may increase. (8) The small bundle may fall down. (9) The truth should blossom. (10) Water may drop.
(C) (1) Citizens will sleep. (2) Beauty will bloom. (3) The government will endeavour. (4) Seeds will sprout. (5) Wood will burn. (6) The state will enthuse. (7) Karmas will vanish. (8) Suffering will spread. (9) Aircrafts will fly. (10) The truth will shine.
(D) (1) The head ached. (2) The citizen stayed. (3) The thread broke. (4). Wood vanished. (5). Fear disappeared. (6) Pleasure appeared. (7). Knowledge succeeded. (8) The aircraft flied. (9) The cloth burned.
Correct the following sentences in two ways. (i) Use the Verbal form according to the subject. (ii) Use the subject according to the Verbal form.
(1) Siram Dukkhanti. (2) Lakkuda Jalante. (3) Vimāṇāim Uddadi. (4) Udagam Cuihinti. (5) Nayarajaṇāņi Palai. (6) Jivanaṁ Tavantu. (7) Maṇāim Ucchahadu. (8). Dhannam Uppajjissinti. (9) Saccam Chuṭṭire. (10) Veraggāni Sohai.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

73

Page #97

(1) ȧ-ending Nouns (Feminine)
74
Parikkha = Examination Siyȧ = Sītā
Sasa = Sister
Våyå = Speech
Kamala Wealth
Gangå = Ganges Taṇaya = Daughter Kahȧ = Story
Jäyȧ = Woman
Mehå Intelligence Bhukkha Hunger Tanha = Desire
Kannā Girl Guha = Cave
Suya Daughter
Måyå - Mother
Anȧ = Order
Karuna = Compassion
Jarȧ = Old age
Nammayȧ = Naramada Jaunā Yamuna
Faith
Saddha Sanjhȧ Evening
Tisa Thirst
==
Nisȧ = Night Kalasiyȧ = Small earthen
water pot
=
=

Lesson 38
Nouns and Verbs
=
=
Jhumpaḍă = Hut
Paiṭṭha Reputation
Sikkha Education Mairȧ = Wine
Iccha Desire
Dhüä = Daughter
Mahila = Woman Himsȧ Violence
H
=
=
=
=
=
Niddǎ = Sleep
Pasaṁså Praise
Soha Splendour
Saria
River Gaḍda Ditch, Pit Naṇanda Husband's sister Panna Wisdom Bhajjȧ = Wife
-
=
=
33
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #98

(2) Intransitive Verbs
Chajja - To shine Uvarama : To detach Biha : To fear Thambha - To stop, To halt Khaya : To vanish Joha - To fight Ussasa - To breathe Khañja - To limp
Chubbha : To agitate Gadayada = To whine Uvasama = To calm down Kilisa - To grieve Jambha : To yawn Khása - To cough Uvavisa - To sit Giijha - To attach Khedda - To play
Khisa : To move away
All the above Nouns are å-ending Feminine. All the above Verbs are Intransitive.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
75

Page #99

Intransitive Verbs
Hasa = To laugh
Sasă
Nominative Case
(Singular)
Māyā
Mäyǎ
Lesson 39
ȧ-ending Nouns (Feminine) Nominative Singular
Sasa = Sister
Māyȧ
Nominative Case
(Singular)
Sasa
76

Hasai/Hasei/Hasae / Hasadi/Hasedi/Hasade
Present Tense (Singular)
Jaggai/Jaggei/Jaggae/
Nominative Case
(Singular)
Sasa
Imperative
(Singular)
Hasau/Haseu /
Hasadu/Hasedu
Jaggau/Jaggeu/
Jaggadu/Jaggedu
Past Tense
(Singular)
Hasia
Jaggia
}
Mäyȧ Mother
Jagga To wake up
=
}
=
=
The sister laughs.
= The sister should laugh.
The mother wakes up.
1=1
The mother should wake up.
The sister laughed.
- The mother woke up.

Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #100

Nominative Case Future Tense (Singular)
(Singular) Hasihii/Hasihie/ Hasihidi/Hasihide/ Sasa Hasissai/Hasissae/Hasissadi/Hasissadel 7
The sister will laugh.
Hasissidi/Hasisside
Mäyá
Jggihii/Jggihie/Jggihidi/Jggihide/ Jggissai/JggissaelJggissadi/Jggissade/ Jggissidi/Jggisside
The mother will wake up.
1. Saså= Nominative Case Singular (å-ending Feminine) 2. In the a-ending Feminine, 'Sasa' etc. Zero suffix is used in the
Nominative Case Singular. 3. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. In the Active Voice,
Subject (Person, Thing etc.) is used in the Nominative Case. 4. All the above-mentioned Verbs are Intransitive. 5. The Verbal form which is used with the above-mentioned Nouns is
of the 'Third Person Singular Number'. 6. With Nouns used in the Nominative Case, the verb used is of the
“Third Person Pronoun'. Here Noun is in the Singular Number, therefore, Verb is also of the Singular Number.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
77

Page #101

Sasă Sister
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa = To laugh
Nominative Case
(Plural) Sasä Sasão Sasau
Mayȧo Māyāu
in ham ho
=
Mayȧo Mäyȧu
Lesson 40
å-ending Nouns (Feminine) Nominative Plural
Nominative Case
(Plural) Sasă Sasão Sasau
(Plural) Sasă Sasão Sasau
Nominative Case
78

Present Tense
(Plural)
Hasanti/Hasenti
Hasante/Hasire
Imperative (Plural)
Maya Mother
Jagganti/Jaggenti Jaggante/Jaggire
Jagga = To wake up
Hasantu/Hasentu
Past Tense
(Plural)
Hasia
=
=
=
=
=
Jaggantu/Jaggentu Mothers should wake up.
Sisters laugh.

Mothers wake up.
Sisters should laugh.
Sisters laughed.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #102

Måyå
Jaggia
: Mothers woke up.
Mayão Mayau
Nominative Case Future Tense (Plural)
(Plural) Sasa Hasihinti/Hasihinte/Hasihiire/ Sasão Hasissanti/Hasissante/Hasissaire Sasau Hasissinti/Hasissinte/Hasisstire
>= Sisters will laugh.
Måyå Jaggihinti/Jaggihinte/Jaggihiire/ Máyão Jaggissanti/Jaggissante/Jaggissairel S: Mothers will Wake up. Måyåu Jaggissinti/Jaggissinte/Jaggissiires
1. Sasa/Sasão/Sasiu: Nominative Case Plural Number
(a-ending Feminine) 2. In the å-ending Feminine Nouns Sasă etc. 'zero', 'u', 'o' suffixes
are used in the Nominatve case Plural. 3. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. In the Active Voice
the Subject (Person, thing etc.) is in the Nominative Case. 4. All the above-mentioned Verbs are Intransitive. 5. The Verbal form used with the above-mentioned Nouns is of the
“Third Person Plural Number'. 6. With the Noun in the Active Voice, the Verb used is of the 'Third
Person Pronoun'. Here the Noun is Plural, therefore, the Verb is also of the Plural Number.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
79

Page #103

80
Lesson 4 1
Exercises
Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta :
(A) -
(1) Sitä shines. (2) The sister agitates. (3) The mother rejoices. (4) Speech tires. (5) The order appears. (6) Wealth increases. (7) Compassion shines. (8) The Ganges spreads. (9) Old age increases. (10) The evening occurs. (11) Girls stop. (12) Huts burn. (13) Small earthen water pots break. (14) Daughters cough. (15) Desires increase. (16) Examinations occur. (17) The evening shines. (18) (Types of) Speech succeed. (19) Rivers dry up. (20) Women endeavour.
(B).
(1) Faith should increase. (2) Hunger should disappear. (3) Wine should end. (4) The daughter should rejoice. (5) Women should mortify. (6) Wisdom should succeed. (7) (Types of) Speech should appear. (8) Women should enthuse.
(C) -
(1) Education will spread. (2) Desires should calm down. (3) Rivers will dry up. (4) Thirst increased. (5) Wealth will shine. (6) The examination will occur. (7) Speech will spread. (8) Caves will vanish. (9) Girls will delay. (10) Sisters will stay.
(D) -
(1) The daughter detached. (2) The sister yawned. (3) The husband's sister limped. (4) The mother coughed.

Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #104

Lesson 42 Past Participle (Use in the Active Voice)
For expressing the purport of the Past Tense, the Past Participle is used in Praksta. The Past Participles are formed by adding the following suffixes to the Verbs. The Past Participles partake of the nature of an Adjective. When the suffixes of this participle are added to the Intransitive Verbs, it can be used in the Active Voice. The inflection of these will be according to the Subject. The subject may be in the Masculine, Neuter and Feminine Genders, therefore the inflection will be accordingly. In the Masculine Gender, the inflexion of the Past Participle will be according to the Masculine Noun 'Deva' and in the Neuter Gender, the inflexion will be according to 'Kamala' and in the Feminine Gender, the inflection will be according to 'Kahá'. The Past Participle is a-ending (in Masculine or Neuter Gender). For changing the Participle into Feminine Gender, the 'a' suffix of the Participle is changed into á. By this, the Participle becomes å-ending Feminine. (A) Verbs
Hasa : To laugh Nacca : To dance
Jagga = To wake up Ho: To become or To exist Suffixes of the Past Hasa
Nacca
Jagga Participle a/ya Hasia/Loucher Naccial Danced Jaggla/ -Woke up hoal - Existed
Hoa/ Laughed
Hasiya . Ņacciya Jaggiya "Hoya ta
Hasita : Laughed Naccita : Danced Jaggita =Woke up Hota - Existed
Hasida • Laughed Naccida -Danced Jaggida :Woke up Hoda : Existed Note - a of a-ending verbs is changed into i. (i) Use in sentences
(Subject Masculine) (Active Voice) (Singular) Narindo Hasio/Hasito/Hasido = The King laughed.
Narindo Hoo/Hoto/Hodo : The King existed. Note • In Ardhamagadhi, Narinda-Narinde is also used. So the sentence will be Narinde Hasie/Hasite - The king laughs.
- Ho
da
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
81

Page #105

Use in sentences
(Active Voice)
(Subject Masculine) (Plural)
Narinda
- Kings laughed.
Hasia/Hasiya/ Hasită/Hasida Hoa/Hoya/ Hota/Hoda
Narinda
: Kings existed.
Viasa - To bloom
Ho - To exist
(B) Verbs
Vaddha - To increase Suffixes of the Past Vaddha Participle
Viasa
Ho
a/ya
Vaddhia/Vaddhiya -
increased Vaddhita : increased Vadąhida -increased
Viasia/Viasiya : Hoa/Hoya :
bloomed existed Viasita - bloomed Hota : existed Viasida : bloomed Hoda : existed
ta
da
Note-a of a-ending verbs is changed into i.
(i) Use in sentences (Subject Neuter) (Active Voice) (Singular)
Viasiam/Viasiyam/ Kamalam
Viasitam/Viasidań
- The lotus bloomed.
Kamalam
Hoam/Hoyam/ Hotar/Hodam
= The lotus existed.
82
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #106

(11) Use in sentences (Subject Neuter) (Active Voice) (Plural) Kamalaiṁ Viasiāim/Viasiaiñ/Viasiáni/ Kamalain Viasitäim/Viasitais/Viasitáni/ - Lotuses bloomed. Kamalani Viasidāim/Viasidais/Viasidăņi
Kamalaim) Hoàiñ/Hoáis/Hoåņi/ Kamalai Hotāim/Hotäis/Hotāni/ Kamaläņi ) Hodāim/Hodāiñ/Hodāņi
- Lotuses existed.
Verbs
Vțţha To get up
Saya : To sleep
Thả = To stay
Saya
Thá
Suffixes of the Past Uttha Participle a/ya Utthia/Utthiya -
got up
Utthita : got up da
Usthida zgot up
Sayia/Sayiya :
slept
Thaa/Țhảya = - stayed
ta
Sayita : slept
Thata : stayed
Sayida : slept
Tháda - Stayed
Note-a of a-ending Verbs is changed into i.
(i) Use in sentences
(Subject Feminine) (Active Voice) (Singluar) Sasa
Utthiä/Utthiya/Utthita/Utthidă - The Sister got up.
Sasa
Thảă/Thayā/Thatá/Thădă
The Sister stayed.
Prákrta Grammar and Composition
83

Page #107

(ii) Use in sentences
(Subject Feminine)
(Plural)
Sasä
Sasão
Sasău
Sasă
Sasão
Sasau
84
(Active Voice)
Utthia/Utthiya/Utthita/Utthida/ Utthião/Utthlyão/Utthitão/Utthidão/ Utthiäu/Utthiyāu/Utthitau/Uṭṭhidău

Thǎa/Thaya/Thata/Thādā/ Thãão/Thãyão/Thatão/Thãdão/ Thăäu/Thủyāu/Thātāu/Thādấu
Note Before using the Past Participle in the Feminine Gender, the Past Participle is changed into Feminine Gender. For changing the Past Participle into Feminine Gender the a suffix is added, as, Utthia Utthia, Uṭṭhida-Uṭṭhida, Utthita-Uṭṭhită.
Sisters got up.
= Sisters stayed.
By this the Past Participle becomes ã-ending Feminine. The inflection of these will be according to 'Kaha'.

Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #108

Lesson 4 3
Present Participle
For expressing the purport of 'laughing', 'sleeping', 'dancing' etc. the Present Participle is used in Präkrta. The Present Participles are formed by adding the following suffixes to the Verbs. The Present Participle partakes of the nature of an Adjective. Therefore, their Genders (Masculine, Neuter and Feminine) Numbers (Singluar, Plural) and cases (Nominative, Accusative etc.) are according to a Noun qualified by an adjective. In the Masculine Gender the inflexion of the Participle will be according to 'Deva', in the Neuter Gender, the inflexion will be according to 'Kamala' and in the Feminine Gender, the inflexion will be according to 'Kaha'. The Present Participle is a-ending (Masculine and Neuter). For changing the Participle into Feminine Gender à is added to the suffix of the Participle. By this, the Participle becomes a-ending Feminine.
(A)
Intransitive Verbs
Suffixes of
the Present
Participle
(i)
Hasa = To laugh Nacca To dance Jagga = To wake up
nta
māņa
Narindo
Hasanta =
Laughing Hasamaņa =
Laughing
Use in sentences :
Masculine
Narindo
Hasa

Nacca
(Present Participle)
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
Naccanta
Jagganta =
Dancing
Waking up
Jaggamāṇa
Naccamāņa = Dancing
Waking up
(Noun qualified by an adjective i.e., Present Participle Masculine, Singular Number, Nominative Case (In all the Tenses)
(Present Tense)
(Singular)
Hasanto/Hasamāņo
ㄓ
Jagga
Utthai etc. The Laughing
king gets up.

=>
=
(Imperative)
Hasanto/Hasamāņo Utthau etc. The Laughing
king should
get up.
85

Page #109

(Past Tense)
Narindo
Hasanto/ (i) Utthia : The Laughing Hasamāņo
king got up. (Past Participle) (ii) Utthio etc. : The Laughing
king got up
(Future Tense) Hasanto/Hasamaņo Utthihii etc. = The Laughing
king will get up.
Narindo
Note - 1. Here inflexion of the Present Participle agrees with the
qualified Noun 'Narinda’. Here 'Narinda' is in the Nominative Case therefore, the Participle is also in the Nominative Case. If the qualified Noun “Narinda' is inflected in the Accusative, Instrumental, Dative etc. cases, the Present Participle will be
inflected accordingly. These cases will be dealt with later on. Note - 2. In Ardhamagadhi Narinda- Narinde will be in the
Nominative case. So the Present Participle will be Hasante, Hasamāṇe in the Nominative case. So the sentence will be as follows. Narinde Hasante/Hasamaņe Utthai etc. (Present Tense) In other Tenses the sentences can be constructed likewise.
(11) Use in sentences :- Noun qualified by an adjective i.e.,
Present Participle Masculine, Plural,
Nominative Case (In all the Tenses) (Mas.) (Present Participle) (Present Tense)
(Plural)
Narindă
Hasanta/ Hasamana
Utthanti/etc. - Laughing kings get up.
86
Prákrta Grammar and Composition

Page #110

Narindä
Narindā
Narindå
(B)
Suffixes of
the Present
Participle
Hasanta/
Hasamāņā
Hasantă/
Hasamaņā
Kamalam
Intransitive Verbs
Vaddha = To increase
Kamalam
Hasantȧ/ Hasamaņā

(Singular)
(Imperative)
(Past Tense)
(i) Utthia = Laughing kings got up.
Utthantu/etc.
(ii) Uṭṭhia
nta
Vaddhanta
= increasing
māņa Vaddhamāņa = increasing (i) Use in sentences
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
Viasantam/
Viasamāņaṁ
Vaddha
Viasantam/
Viasamāņaṁ
(Past Participle)
=
(Future Tense)
Utthihinti/etc.
Laughing kings got up.
(Neut.) (Present Participle) (Present Tense)
Laughing kings should get up.
=
Viasa
Viasa To bloom
Viasanta
= blooming
Viasamaņa = blooming
Noun qualified by an adjective i.e., Present Participle Neuter, Singular Number, Nominative Case (In all the Tenses)
Laughing kings will get up.
(Imperative)
Sohai/etc. The blooming lotus shines.

Sohau/etc. The blooming
lotus should shine.
87

Page #111

Kamalaṁ
(Past Tense) Viasantam/ (i) Sohia = The blooming lotus Viasamaņam
shone. (Past Participle) (ii) Sohias/etc.- The blooming lotus
shone. (Future Tense) Viasantam/ Sohihii/etc. = The blooming lotus Viasamâna
will shine.
shan
Kamalam
Use in sentences : Noun qualified by an adjective i.e.,
Present Participle Neuter, Plural Number, Nominative case (In all the
Tenses) (Neut.) (Present Participle) (Present Tense)
(Plural)
Kamalaiṁ
Sohanti/etc. = Blooming lotuses
Kamalaiṁ
Viasantaim/ Viasantaiṁ/ Vlasantaņi
shine.
Kamalani
(Imperative)
Sohantu/etc. - Blooming lotuses
Kamalaiń Kamaláin Kamalāņi
Viasantaim/ Viasantain/ Viasantāņi
should shine.
(Past Tense)
(i) Sohia
Kamalaim Kamalāií Kamalāņi
Viasantaiṁ! Viasantaiṁ/ Viasantāņi
- Blooming lotuses
shone.
Kamalaim Kamalāiñ Kamalāni
Viasantaim/ Viasantaiń/ Viasantaņi
(Past Participle) (ii) Sohiāim/Sohiäis/ Sohiāni - Blooming lotuses
shone.
88
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #112

SO
nta
(Future Tense) Kamalai Viasantaiṁ/ Sohihinti/etc. - Blooming lotuses Kamalāiñ Viasantaiṁ/
will shine. Kamalāni Viasantaņi (C) Intransitive Verbs Ņacca - To dance
Saya : To sleep Suffixes of the Present Participle Ņacca
Saya Ņaccanta - Dancing Sayanta = Sleeping måņa
Ņaccamāņa - Dancing Sayamāņa - Sleeping (1) Use in sentences: Noun qualified by an adjective i.e.,
Present Participle Feminine, Singular, Nominative Case
(In all the Tenses) Note - First of all the Participle should be changed into Feminine
Gender. For this add å suffix (saccantă, Sayantă, Ņaccamåņā, Sayamana). It will now be inflected according to 'Kaha'. (For forming the Feminine Gender 'i' suffix is also used, as Ņaccanti, Sayanti, Ņaccamāņi, Sayamaņi. Their inflexion will be according to the Feminine Gender Noun 'lacchi'. i-ending terms will be dealt with later on).
(Fem.) (Present Participle) (Present Tense)
(Singular)
Sasa
Ņaccanta/ Ņaccamāņa
Thakkai/etc. - The Dancing
sister tires. (Imperative) Thakkau/etc. - The Dancing
sister should tire.
Sasa
Ņaccantă/ Ņaccamāņā
Praksta Grammar and Composition
89

Page #113

Saså
Sasă
(2) Use in sentences:
Naccanta/ Naccamāņā
·
Naccantȧ/ Naccamănă
90
(PastTense)

(Past Participle)
(Plural)
(i) Thakkia - The Dancing
sister tired.
Note First of all the Participle should be changed into Feminine Gender. For this add a suffix (Naccantă, Sayantă, Naccamāņā, Sayamaņā). It will now be inflected according to 'Kaha'.
(Future Tense)
(ii) Thakkiȧ/ = The Dancing Thakkidā
sister tired.
Sasā Naccantă/Naccamāṇā Sasão Naccantão/Naccamȧņão Sasau Naccantau/Ṇaccamāṇāu
Noun qualified by an adjective i.e., Present Participle Feminine,
Plural, Nominative Case (In all the Tenses)
For forming the Feminine Gender 'i' suffix is also used, as Naccanti, Sayanti, Ņaccamāņi, Sayamāņi. Their inflexion will be according to the Feminine Gender Noun 'lacchi'. i-ending terms will be dealt with later on.
(Fem.) (Present Participle) (Present Tense)
Thakkihii/etc. = The Dancing
sister will tire.
Sasă Naccanta/Naccamāṇā Sasão Naccantão/Naccamāņȧo Sasau Naccantau/Ṇaccamāṇāu
Thakkanti/etc. Dancing sisters
tire.
(Imperative)
=
Thakkantu/etc. = Dancing sisters
may tire.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #114

(Past Tense) Sasà Ņaccanta/Ņaccamáñá (i) Thakkia Dancing sisters Sasão Naccantáo/Ņaccamāņão
tired. Sasāu Ņaccantau/Naccamaņau
(Past Participle) Sasă Ņaccantå/Ņaccamāņa (ii) Thakkiä/Thakkião/ Sasão Ņaccantao/Ņaccamāņáo Thakkiau - Dancing sisters Sasau Ņaccantău/Ņaccamāņau
tired.
(Future Tense) Sasa Ņaccanta/Naccamāņá Thakkihinti/etc. - Dancing sisters Sasão Ņaccantao/Ņaccamāņão
will tire. Sasku Ņaccantau/Ņaccamåņău
1. 2.
All the above verbs are Intransitive. All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. For expressing Past Tense Past Participle is also used.
Prákyta Grammar and Composition
91

Page #115

Lesson 44
Exercises Translate the following sentences into Prakrta. For expressing the Past Tense make use of the Past Participle and the Verb in the Past Tense :(A). (1) The embarrassing son sits. (2) The barking dog runs away. (3) The suffering grandfather slept. (4) The endeavouring friend rejoiced. (5) The fearing child weeps. (6) The burning cloth will vanish. (7) Trembling demons sit. (8) Spreading oceans will dry up. (9) Quarrelling grandsons trembled. (10) Dancing camels tire. (11) The whining son sat. (12) The laughing man should live. (13) The rejoicing father should endeavour. (14) The floundering demon died. (15) Dropping water dried up.
(B).
(1) Burning wood vanishes. (2) The endeavouring citizen lived. (3) Increasing detachment shines. (4) The flying aircraft fell down. (5) Fighting kingdoms vanish. (6) Increasing moral conduct blossoms. (7) Mistaking government fears. (8) Succeeding truth will shine. (9) Vanishing Karmas separate. (10) Tumbling down small bundles fell.
(C)(1) The rejoicing daughter got up. (2) Increasing faith shines. (3) The calming down wife sleeps. (4) The enthusing mother sits. (5) The spreading Narmadá dried up. (6) Burning huts vanished. (7) Increasing reputation shines. (8) Grieving women go round. (9) The appearing speech succeeded. (10) Burning grass vanished.
92
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #116

Lesson 4 5 Past Participle (Use in the Impersonal form) Nouns
Pronouns a-ending Masculine Gender Narinda Amha - Aham/Har/Ammi
(Personal PronounFirst Person, Nominative
Singular) a-ending Neuter Gender Kamala Tumha+Tumam/Tum/Tuha
(Personal PronounSecond Person, Nominative
Singular) å-ending Feminine Gender Sasa Ta So (Masculine)
(Personal PronounThird Person, Nominative Singular) Tå-Så (Feminine) (Personal PronounThird Person, Nominative Singular)
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa - To laugh Viasa - To bloom
Jagga = To wake up Vaddha : To increase
(1) Instrumental
Neuter Gender
- The king laughed.
Singular
Singular
Hasiam/Hasidam/ Narindena/Narindenam
Hasiyam/Hasitam Kamalena/Kamalena
Viasiam/Viasidaṁ/ Viasiyaṁ/Viasitam
: The lotus bloomed.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
93

Page #117

Sasãe/Sasai/Sasǎa
Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
Tai/Tae/Tume/Tumae
Teņa/Tenaṁ
Tãe/Tai/Taa
(ii) Instrumental
Plural
Narindehi/
Narindehim/
Narindehim
Kamalehi/
Kamalehim/
Kamalehim
Sasahi/Sasähim/
Sasähim
Amhehi/Amhāhi
94

Jaggiam/Jaggidam/ Jaggiyam/Jaggitaṁ
Hasiam/Hasidam/
Hasiyam/Hasitam
Hasiam/Hasidam/
Hasiyam/Hasitam
Hasiam/Hasidam/
Hasiyam/Hasitam
Hasiam/Hasidam/
Hasiyam/Hasitam
Neuter Gender
Singular
Hasiam/Hasidam/
Hasiyam/Hasitam
Jaggiam/Jaggidam/ Jaggiyam/Jaggitam
Hasiam/Hasidam/ Hasiyam/Hasitam
=

= I laughed.
- You laughed.
=
=
The sister woke up.
He laughed.
=
Viasiam/Viasidam/
Viasiyam/Viasitam = Lotuses bloomed.
=
She laughed.
Kings laughed.
Sisters laughed.
= We laughed.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #118

Tubbhehim/Tumhehim Hasiam/Hasidam/ Tujjhehim
Hasivam/Hasitam
: You laughed.
Tehi/Tehim/Tehiń
Hasiam/Hasidam/ Hasiyam/Hasitam
- They laughed.
Tähi/Tähis/Tähim
Hasiam/Hasidam) Hasiyam/Hasitam
: They (women)
laughed.
1. (A) Narindeņa/Narindeņam
(a-ending Masculine GenderInstrumental case Singluar)
Kamalena/Kamalena
Sasae/Sasai/Saska
Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
(a-ending Neuter GenderInstrumental case Singular) (a-ending FeminineInstrumental case Singular) (First Person PronounInstrumental case Singular) (Masculine feminine) (Second Person PronounInstrumental case Singular) (Masculine Feminine) (Third Person PronounInstrumental case Singular) (Masculine)
Tai/Tae/Tume/Tumae
Tena/Tenań
Tae/Tải/Tia
(Third Person PronounInstrumental case Singular)
(Feminine) Thus, for the consturction of Instrumental Singular from the a-ending, (Masculine and Neuter) Nouns. 'na', and ‘ņam' suffixes are added to them, and on adding ‘ņa' and 'ņam”. the a of a-ending nouns is changed into 'e' (Narindeņa!
Prákrta Grammar and Composition
95

Page #119

Narindeṇam) (Kamaleṇa/Kamaleṇaṁ). In the Singular of āending Feminine Nouns 'e', 'I', 'a' suffixes are added, (Sasǎe/ Sasai/Sasǎa). The Third Person Pronoun, Instrumental Singular (Masculine) and the Third Person Pronoun, Instrumental Singular (Feminine) are inflected like a-ending Masculine and ä-ending Feminine Nouns as above. The rest, First Person and Second Person Pronouns should be learnt in the above-mentioned manner.
(B) Narindehi/Narindehim/
96
Narindehim
Kamalehi/Kamalehim/
Kamalehim
Sasahi/Sasahim/Sasähim
Amhehi/Amhähi
Tubbhehim/Tumhehim
Tujjhehim
Tehi/Tehim/Tehim
Tähi/Tahim/Tahim
(a-ending Masculine GenderInstrumental case Plural)

(a-ending Neuter GenderInstrumental case Plural)
(ǎ-ending FeminineInstrumental case Plural)
(First Person PronounInstrumental case Plural)
(Masculine-Feminine)
(Second Person PronounInstrumental case Plural)
(Masculine-Feminine)
(Third Person Pronoun
Instrumental case Plural) (Feminine)
For the construction of Instrumental Plural of a-ending Masculine and Neuter Nouns and a-ending Feminine Nouns.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
(Third Person PronounInstrumental case Plural) (Masculine)

Page #120

2.
3.
'hi', 'him', 'him' suffixes are added to them. In adding these suffixes the a of a-ending nouns is changed into 'e'. (Narindehi/ Narindehim/Narindehim; and there is no change in the ã-ending
Nouns Sasǎhi/Sasahim/Sasähim).
First Person, Second Person and Third Person Pronouns of the instrumental Plural should be learnt in the above mentioned manner.
(C) In Ardhamȧgadhi the First Person Instrumental Plural (Amhehim) is used. (Pischel P. 614)
If the Verb is Intransitive, the Past Participle also takes the Impersonal Form. For changing the Past Participle into the Impersonal Form, the Subject is changed into the Instrumental Singular or Plural and the Participle will always be inflected in the Nonimative Case Neuter Gender Singular Number.
All the above Verbs are Intransitive and all the sentences are in the impersonal form. This type of Impersonal form does not exist in English.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

97

Page #121

Lesson 46
Exercise
Translate the following sentences into Prākstā :
(1) Water dropped.
(2) Clouds thundered. (3) The friend rejoiced. (4) Dishonour spread. (5) The ocean dried.
(6) Fire burned. (7) Death vanished.
(8) We trembled. (9) You went round.
(10) He played. (11) The aircraft flied. (12) She rejoiced. (13) Woods burned.
(14) The sun rose. (15) Men emanated.
(16) Dogs barked. (17) Wells dried up.
(18) Demons died. (19) Jewels shined.
(20) Lions roared. (21) The examination occurred. (22) Girls hided. (23) Women calmed down. (24) The daughter coughed. (25) Reputation disappeared. (26) Old age increased. (27) Pleasure ended.
(28) Rice grew up. (29) Hunger calmed down. (30) States fought. (31) They tired.
(32) You feared. (33) They (Feminine) played. (34) Both of you bathed. (35) The small bundle fell down.
98
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #122

Lesson 4 7
Intransitive Verbs (use in the Impersonal form)
Nouns
a-ending Masculine Gender Narinda
a-ending Neuter Gender Kamala
å-ending Feminine Gender Sasă
Intransitive Verbs
Hasa To laugh
Vaddha To increase
=
Pronouns
Amha
(Personal Pronoun
First Person, Nominative
Singular)

-
Aham/Ham/Ammi
Tumha-Tumaṁ/Tum/Tuha
(Personal Pronoun -
Second Person, Nominative Singular)
Ta →So (Masculine)
(Personal Pronoun
Third Person, Nominative
Singular)
Ta-Så (Feminine)
(Personal Pronoun
Third Person, Nominative
Singular)
Jagga = To wake up
Viasa = To bloom
-
The above-mentioned Verbs are Intransitive. Intransitive Verbs are used in the Nominative case and in the Impersonal form. For the construction of the Impersonal forms from the Intransitive Verbs, 'ijja' and 'ia', 'iya' suffixes are added to the Verbs. In the Impersonal forms the subject is used in the Instrumental case (Singular or Plural). After adding the suffixes of the Impersonal form to the Verbs, suffixes (i, e, di, de) of the Third Person Singular Number are added. The Impersonal form is formed in the Present Tense, Past Tense and in the
Prákrta Grammar and Composition

99

Page #123

Imperative. In the Future Tense, the Verbal inflexion in the Nominative Case continues. In it the suffixes 'ijja' etc. are not added to the Verbs. For expressing the Past Tense the Past Participle is used in the Impersonal form. This type of Impersonal form does not exist in English.
Suffixes of the
Impersonal form Hasa
ijja
ia /iya
Hasijja
Instrumental Singular
(Noun)
Hasia/
Hasiya
Narindena/Narindeṇam
Kamalena/Kamalenam
Sasãe/Sasǎi/Sasǎa
Instrumental Singular
(Pronoun)
Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
100
Tai/Tae/Tume/Tumae

Present Tense
(Third Person
Singular)
Hasijjai
Hasijjadi
Hasiai/
Hasiadi
etc.
Past Tense Imperative
(Third Person
(Third Person
Singular)
Singular)
Hasijjau
Hasijjadu
Hasiau/
Hasiadu
Hasijjaia
(Hasijjia)
Hasiaia
(Hasija)
Present Tense
Hasijjai/etc.
Hasiai/etc.
Viasijjai/etc.
Viasiai/etc.
Jaggijjai/etc.
Jaggiai/etc.
Hasijjai/etc.
Hasiai/etc.
Hasijjai/etc. Hasiai/etc.
= The king laughs.

-
The lotus blooms.
The sister wakes up.
1
= I laugh.
==
: You laugh.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #124

Tena/Tenam
Hasijjai/etc. Hasiai/etc.
: He laughs.
Tae/Tải/Túa
Hasijjai/etc. Hasiai/etc.
- She laughs.
Instrumental Singular Imperative (Noun) Narindena/
Hasijjau/Hasijjadu Narindeņam
Hasiau/Hasiadu
The king should
laugh.
The lotus may
Kamalena/ Kamalenań
Vlasijau/Viasijjadu Viasiau/Viasiadu
bloom.
Sasăe/Sasai/
Jaggijjau/Jaggijjadu Jaggiau/Jaggiadu
The sister should wake up.
Sasāa
Instrumental Singular (Pronoun) Mai/Mael
Hasijjau/Hasijjadu Me/Mamae
Hasiau/Hasiadu
: I should laugh.
Tai/Tae/ Tume/Tumae
Hasijjau/Hasijjadu Hasiau/Hasiadu
• You should laugh.
Tena/Tenam
Hasijau/Hasijjadu Hasiau/Hasiadu
- He should laugh.
Tae/Tài/Tāa
Hasijjau/Hasijjadu
= She should laugh.
Hasiau/Hasiadu
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
101

Page #125

Instrumental Singular Past Tense
(Noun)
Narindena/Narindeṇam
Kamalena/Kamaleṇam
Sasãe/Sasai/Sasǎa
Instrumental Singular
(Pronoun)
Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
Teṇa/Teṇam
Tãe/Tai/Tȧa
Tai/Tae/Tume/Tumae Hasijjia/Hasiaia
Hasijjaia (Hasijjia) Hasiaia (Hasiia)
Viasijjaia (Viasijjia) Viasiaia (Viasiia)
Narindena/Narindeṇam
Jaggijjaia (Jaggijjia)
Jaggiaia (Jaggiia)
102

Hasijjia/Hasiaia
Instrumental Singular Future Tense
(Noun)
Hasijjia/Hasiaia = I laughed.
- The king laughed.
=
Hasihii/etc.
The lotus bloomed.
=
Hasijjia/Hasiaia = He laughed.
Note: (i) In the Impersonal form Past Participle is also used for expressing the Past Tense. (See lesson 45 (ii))
The sister woke up.

(ii) The Verble forms of Tha etc. will be Thaijjasi/Thāiasi, Thaijjahi/Thaiahi, Thāijjahia, Thǎiahia
You laughed.
= She laughed.
Note: In this way other sentences should be constructed. Hasihii is
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
=
The king will laugh.

Page #126

used in the Nominative case. In the Future Tense this Verbal form is used in the impersonal form. In it ijja etc. suffixes are not added.
Instrumental Plural
Present Tense
Noun Narindehi/
Hasijjai/etc.
Kings laugh.
Narindehim/
Hasiai/etc.
Narindehiń
Kamalehi/ Kamalehim/ Kamalehin
Viasijjai/etc. Viasiai/etc.
: Lotuses bloom.
Sasahi/Sasāhim/
Jaggijjai/etc.
Sisters wake up.
Sasāhiñ
Jaggiai/etc.
Instrumental Plural
Pronoun
We laugh.
Amhehi/Amhähi Hasijjai/etc.
Hasiai/etc. Tubbhehirn/Tumhehim Hasijiai/etc. Tujjhehin
Hasiai/etc.
• You laugh.
Tehi/Tehim/Tehis
Hasiljai/etc. Hasijjai/etc. Hasiai/etc.
They (Masculine) laugh.
Tahi/Tāhim/Tahiń
Hasijjai/etc. Hasiai/etc.
• They (Feminine) laugh.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
103

Page #127

Instrumental Plural Imperative
Noun
Narindehi/
Narindehim/
Narindehim
Kamalehi/
Kamalehim/
Kamalehim
Sasähi/Sasahim/
Sasähim
Instrumental Plural
Pronoun
Amhehi/Amhāhi
Tujjhehim
Tehi/Tehim/Tehim
Tähi/Tähim/Tahim
Tubbhehim/Tumhehim Hasijjau/Hasijjadu/
Hasiau/Hasiadu
104
Hasijjau/Hasijjadu/ Hasiau/Hasiadu

Viasijjau/Viasijjadu/
Viasiau/Viasiadu
Jaggijjau/Jaggijjadu/ Jaggiau/Jaggiadu
Hasijjau/Hasijjadu/ Hasiau/Hasiadu
Hasijjau/Hasijjadu/ Hasiau/Hasiadu
Hasijjau/Hasijjadu/ Hasiau/Hasiadu
=

=
-
=
=
Kings should
laugh.
Lotuses may
bloom.
Sister should
wake up.
We should laugh.
You should laugh.
They (Masculine) should laugh.
They (Feminine) should laugh.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #128

Instrumental Plural
Past Tense
(Noun) Narindehi/Narindehim Narindehim
Hasijjaia (Hasijjia) Hasiaia (Hasiia)
: Kings laughed.
Note: In the same way other sentences should be constructed.
Instrumental Plural
(Pronoun) Amhehi/ Amhahi
Hasijjaia (Hasijjia)
- We laughed.
Hasiaia (Hasiia)
Note: In the same way other sentences should be constructed. Note: (i) In the Impersonal form Past Participle is also used for
expressing the Past Tense. (See lesson 45 (ii)] . (ii) The Verbal forms of Țhá etc. will be Thāiļjasi/Țhājasi,
Thäijjahi/Thāiahi, Thäijjhia, Thaiahia. Instrumental Plural Future Tense Noun
Narindehi/
Hasihii/etc.
- Kings will laugh.
Narindehim/ Narindehiñ
Instrumental Plural
Pronoun
Amhehi/Amhāhi
Hasihii/etc.
- We shall laugh.
Note: In the same way other sentences should be constructed.
In the impersonal form of the Future Tense the above forms are used. In them ijja/ia etc. suffixes are not added.
See Lesson 45 1 (A). See Lesson 45 1 (B). All the above Verbs are Intransitive and all the sentences are of the Impersonal form.
Praksta Grammar and Composition
105

Page #129

Lesson 48
Exercises
Translate the following sentences into Prāksta. While translating use the Impersonal form of the Verbs.
(1) The aircraft flies. (2) Water drops. (3) The friend rejoices. (4) The oceans dries. (5) Wood burns. (6) We tremble. (7) They play. (8) The small bundle falls down. (9) Lions roar. (10) Girls hide.
(11) They should play. (12) Men should endeavour. (13) Women should calm down. (14) States may fight. (15) Daughters may tire. (16) The mother should rejoice. (17) Education should spread. (18) Faith should increase. (19) Examination should occur. (20) They (Feminine) should embarrass.
(21) The aircraft will fly. (22) States will fight. (23) They will jump. (24) Dogs will bark. (25) Seeds will sprout.
(26) The state fought. (27) Men ran away. (28) The mother rejoiced. (29) They coughed. (30) The dog barked.
106
Prākta Grammar and Composition

Page #130

Lesson 49
Obligatory and Potential Participle (use in the Impersonal Form)
For expressing the purport of 'should laugh', should 'wake up' etc. the obligatory and Potential Participle is also used in Prakrta. The Obligatory and Potential Participles are formed by adding the following suffixes to the Verbs. For using the said Participle in the Impersonal form the Subject is inflected in the Singular or Plural Instrumental case and the said Participle will always be in the Nominative Neuter Gender Singular. The said Participle is not used in the Active Voice. The inflexion of the Obligatory and Potential Participle will be according to Kamala (Neuter Gender).
Nouns
a-ending Masculine Narinda
a-ending Neuter Kamala
ǎ-ending Feminine Sasȧ
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Pronouns
Amha
-
Aham/Ham/Ammi
(Personal Pronoun -
First Person, Nominative
Singular) Tumha-Tumam/Tum/Tuha
(Personal Proncun
Second Person, Nominative Singular)
Ta So (Masculine)
(Personal Pronoun
Third Person, Nominative Singular)
Tä-Så (Feminine)
(Personal Pronoun
Third Person, Nominative Singular)

107

Page #131

Intransitive Verbs
Hasa To laugh Jagga To wake up
=
=
Suffixes of the
Obligatory and Potential
Participle
Hasa
(1) avva/
yavva
Narindeņa/
Narindenam
(2) tavva
davva
niya
Jagganiya
Hasaniya ('niya' suffix is used only in the a-ending verbs.)
Instrumental
Singular (Noun)
Kamalena/
Kamalenam
Sasãe/Sasai/
Sasȧa
Mai/Mae/
Me/Mamae
108
Hasiavva/Hasiyavva Jaggiavva/Jaggiyavva Viasiavva/Viasiyavva Haseavva/Haseyavva Jaggeavva/Jaggeyavva Viaseavva/Viaseyavva
Jagga
Hasitavva/Hasetavva Jaggitavva/Jaggetavva Viasitavva/Viasetavva Hasidavva/Hasedavva Jaggidavva/Jaggedavva Viasidavva/Viasedavva

Neuter Gender
Singular
Hasidavvam/Hasaniyam/
Haseavvam/Haseyavvam/
Hasetavvam/Hasedavvam
Instrumental
Singular (Pronoun)
Hasiavvam/Hasiyavvam/Hasitavvam/
Viasidavvam/Viasaniyam/
Viaseavvam/Viaseyavvam/
Viasetavvam/ Viasedavvaṁ
Viasa = To bloom
Viasiavvam/Viasiyavvam/Viasitavvam/
Jaggdiavvam/Jagganiyam/
Jaggeavvam/Jaggeyavvam/
Jaggetavvam/Jaggedavvaṁ
Viasa
Neuter Gender
Singular
Vlasaniya
Hasidavvam/Hasaniyam/ Haseavvam/Haseyavvam/ Hasetavvam/Hasedavvaṁ
Jaggiavvam/Jaggiyavvam/Jaggitavvam/
Hasiavvam/Hasiyavvam/Hasitavvaṁ/

: The king should laugh.
: The lotus
may bloom.
The sister should wake up.
: I should laugh.
Prákṛta Grammar and Composition

Page #132

Tai/Tae/
Tume/Tumae
Tena/
Tenam
Tãe/Tai/
Taa
Instrumental
Plural (Noun)
Narindehi/
Narindehim/
Narindehim
Kamalehi/
Kamalehim/
Kamalehim
Sasǎhi/
Sasähim/ Sasǎhim
Hasiavvam/Hasiyavvam/Hasitavvam/
Haseavvam/Haseyavvam/Hasetavvam/

Hasidavvam/Hasaniyam/
Hasedavvam
Hasiavvam/Hasiyavvam/Hasitavvaṁ/
Haseavvam/Haseyavvam/Hasetavvam/
Hasidavvam/Hasaniyam/
Instrumental
Plural (Pronoun)
Amhehi/
Amhähi
Hasedavvam
Hasidavvam/Hasaniyam/
Hasiavvam/Hasiyavvam/Hasitavvam/
Haseavvam/Haseyavvam/Hasetavvam/
Hasedavvaṁ
Neuter Gender
Singular
Hasidavvam/Hasaniyam/
Hasedavvam
Hasiavvam/Hasiyavvaṁ/Hasitavvaṁ/
Kings
Haseavvam/Haseyavvam/Hasetavvam/ should laugh.
Viasidavvam/Viasaniyam/
Viaseavvam/Viaseyavvam/
Viasetavvam/Viasedavvam
Jaggidavvam/Jagganiyam/
Jaggeavvam/Jaggeyavvam/
Jaggetavvam/Jaggedavvaṁ
-You should laugh.
Viasiavvam/Viasiyavvaṁ/Viasitavvam/
Neuter Gender Singular
Hasidavvam/Hasaniyam/
-He should laugh.
Jaggiavvam/Jaggiyavvam/Jaggitavvam/
-She should laugh.
Hasedavvam
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
Hasiavvam/Hasiyavvam/Hasitavvam/

=
=
=
We should
Haseavvam/Haseyavvam/Hasetavvam/ laugh.
Lotuses
may bloom.
Sisters should
wake up.
109

Page #133

Tubbhehim/
Tumhehim/ Hasidavvam/Hasaniyam/
Tujjhehim
Haseavvam/Haseyavvam/
Hasetavvaṁ/Hasedavvaṁ
Tehi/
Tehim/
Tehim
Tähi/
Tähim/
Tähim
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
110
Hasiavvam/Hasiyavvam/Hasitavvam/
Hasiavvam/Hasiyavvaṁ/Hasitavvam/
Hasidavvam/Hasaniyam/
Haseavvam/Haseyavvam/
Hasetavvam/Hasedavvaṁ

1=
Hasidavvam/Hasaniyam/ Haseavvam/Haseyavvam/
Hasetavvaṁ/Hasedavvaṁ
Hasiavvam/Hasiyavvam/Hasitavvam/
They (Masculine)
should laugh.
=
You all should
laugh.
See footnote 1 A of lesson 45.
See footnote 1 B of lesson 45.
All the above Verbs are intransitive and all the sentences are in the impersonal form.

They (Feminine) should laugh.
After adding the suffixes avva/yavva/tavva/davva the a of a-ending Verbs is changed into i and e. In the a-ending etc. Verbs these suffixes are also added - Thayavva. Thādavva, Thatavva, Hoyavva, Hodavva, Neyavva, Nedavva etc.
In Ardhamagadhi the suffix nijja is also added to the a-ending Verbs of obligatory and Potential Participle. - Hasanijja, Jagganijja etc. (Ghatage P. 144, Pischel. P. 812)
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #134

Lesson 50
Exercise
Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta.
(1) States may fight.
(2) Faith should increase.
(3) They should play.
(4) The mother should rejoice.
(5) Men should emanate.
(6) They (Feminine) should embarrass.
(7) Dogs should bark.
(8) Women should dance.
(9) Girls should hide.
(10) Friends should rejoice.
(11) Wood should burn.
(12) The sister should calm down.
(13) The lion should roar.
(14) He should play.
(15) I should jump.
(16) Both of you should enthuse.
(17) We should fear.
(18) The demon should die.
(19) Seeds should sprout. (20) The aircraft should fly.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

111

Page #135

Lesson 5 1
Noun - Pronoun Accusative Case Singular Number
(Transitive Verbs)
a-ending
Masculine
a-ending
Neuter
ǎ-ending
Feminine
Transitive Verbs
Rakkha = To protect
Suņa
Paṇama
Kha
Narindo
Rajjaṁ
Noun
Narinda King
Karaha Camel
112
(i) a-ending Masculine Gender
Paramesara = God
Bhoyana Food
Tina = Grass
Rajja = State
Mäyä = Mother
Kahȧ = Story
Sikkha Education
=
=
To hear, To listen
= To salute
= To eat
=
Narindam
Māyā Narindam

Accusative Singular
Narindam
Karahaṁ
(Accusative Case Present Tense
Singular) Paramesaram
Paramesaram
Bhoyanam
Tinam
Rajjam
Māyam
Kaham
Sikkhaṁ
Påla = To bring up
Cara To graze
Jāņa To know, To understand
=
Panamai/Panamadi/etc. The king
salutes God.
Rakkhai/Rakkhadi/etc. The state
protects the King.
Panamai/Panamadi/etc. The mother
salutes the King.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #136

(it) a-ending Neuter Gender
(Accusative Case Present Tense
Singular) Karaho Tiņam
Carai/Caradi/etc. = The camel
grazes grass. Narindo Rajjam
Rakkhai/Rakkhadi/etc. = The king
protects the State. Máyă Bhoyanam
Khái/Khadi/etc. - The mother eats
food. (iii) a-ending Feminine Gender
(Accusative Case Present Tense
Singular) Narindo Máyam
Panamal/Panamadi/etc. - The king
salutes the mother. Rajjar Sikkham
Jāņai/Jāņadi/etc. - The state
understands education. Maya Kaham
Sunai/Sundi/etc. - The mother listens
to the story. (iv) Pronoun
(Accusative Case Present Tense
Singular) Aham/Ham/Ammi Tumam/Tum
Panamámi/etc. = I salute you. Tumam/Tum/Tuha Mamam/Mam/Mi Pálasi/etc. = You bring me up. So Tam
Janai/Jánadi/etc, = He knows him.
Tam
Jänai/Jánadi/etc. - She knows her.
Tam
Rakkhai/Rakkhadi/etc. - He protects that.
1.
(i)
For the construction of Accusative Case Singular Number from the a-ending Masculine and Neuter Nouns, • suffix is added to them as, Narinda-Narindam, Rajja-Rajjań.
Praksta Grammar and Composition
113

Page #137

For the construction of Accusative Case Singular Number from the a-ending Feminine Nouns, • suffix is also added but on adding . , å is changed into a. (å-a). as Maya-Māyam, Kaha-Kaham. The construction of the Accusative Case Singular Number from the First Person Pronoun will be : Mamam/Maṁ/Mi. The construction of the Accusative Case Singular Number from the Second Person Pronoun will be : Tumaṁ/Tum. The construction of the Accusative Case Singular Number from the Third Person Pronoun (Masculine, Feminine, Neuter) will be : Tam.
2.
All the above verbs are Transitive. The Transitive verb is that in which the effect of the action of the Sujbect goes to the object as, Mother listens to the story', in it the action of the Subject *Mother' is listening'. Its effect goes to the story, because 'story is listened'. Therefore, the object of the Verb 'listen' is 'story'. In other words. "A Transitive Verb denotes an action which passes over from the doer or subject to an object."
All the above sentences are in the Active Voice. In these, the Person and Number of the Verbs are according to the Subject. In other words, the Verb agrees with the Subject in Number and Person. Here in the Noun-sentences the subject is of the Third Person Singular therefore, verbs are of the Third Person Singular Number.
The Present Tense sentences are given above. The sentences of the Future Tense, Past Tense and the Imperative in the Accusative Case Singular should be constructed. After using Nominative Case Plural in place of Nominative Case Singular the sentences in all the Tenses should be constructed.
114
Prāksta Grammar and Composition

Page #138

5. The following are the special types of Transitive Verbs
Soccha = To hear Gaccha : To go Moccha : To forsake Voccha - To say Checcha - To cut off Veccha = To know Daccha - To see Bheccha = To pierce Bhoccha - To eat
(i) The Conjugation of these transitive Verbs in the First Person Sin
gular Number of the Future Tense will be : Soccham Gacchaṁ
Moccham Voccham Checcham
Veccham Daccham Bhecchař
Bhocchar
(ii) Besides, for the construction of the Future Tense, from these Verbs,
hi suffix is dropped and by adding the suffixes of the Present Tense to the verbs in all the three Persons and two Numbers the a of a-ending Verbs is changed into i and e, as, Socchimi/Socchemi etc.
Sometimes hi is retained and the Verbal forms in the Future Tense are Socchihimi etc. are constructed. (Hema. 3-172).
The Conjugation of above verbs in the Future Tense is as follows. For example,
The Conjugation of Soccha in the Future Tense is Singular
Plural First Person (i) Soccham,
(i) Socchimo/Socchimu/ (ii) Socchimi/Socchemi/
Socchima/Socchemo/ (iii) Socchihimi/etc.
Socchemu/Socchema (ii) Socchihimo/etc.
Second Person (i) Socchisi/ Socchesi/
(ii) Socchihisi/etc.
(i) Socchiha/Socchidhal
Soccheha/Socchedha (ii) Socchihiha
Third Person
(i) Socchii/Socchei/ (ii) Socchihii/etc.
(i) Socchinti/Socchintel
Socchiirel (ii) Socchihinti/etc.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
115

Page #139

In Ardhamagadhi the Conjugation of Soccha in the Future Tense is
Singular Plural First Person
Socchåmi, Socchámo Second Person
Socchasi Socchaha Third Person
Socchai
Socchanti
Besides, In Ardhamagadhi, Bhokkhāmi = I shall eat, Hokkhámi = I shall become, Pekkhámi : I shall see etc. are also used. (Ghātage Page 121)
In the First Person Singular of the Future Tense, the Verbal forms like Kahań = I shall do and Dåham = I shall give are also used. Besides, Kā and Då are also Conjugated in the above manner as Kåhimi/ Dahimi. etc.
116
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #140

Lesson 52
Noun - Pronoun Accusative Case Plural Number
Transitive Verbs
a-ending
Masculine
a-ending
Neuter
å-ending
Feminine
(i)
Narindo
Nouns
Narinda = King
Karaha Camel
Paramesara = God
Transitive Verbs
Rajjaṁ
Bhoyana Food
=
Tina = Grass
Rajja = State
Rakkha To protect
1:1
To hear, To listen
Suņa Panama = To salute, To greet = Te eat
Khå
Mäyä = Mother
Kaha = Story
Sikkha = Education

=
a-ending Masculine
(Accusative
Plural)
Narindȧ/
Narinde
Paramesară/ Panamai/
Paramesare Panamadi/etc.
(Present Tense)
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
Rakkhai/ Rakkhadi/etc.
Accusative Case Plural Narinda/Narinde
Karaha/Karahe
Paramesară/Paramesare
Bhoyanǎim/Bhoyaṇāim/
Bhoyanani
Tinaim/Tinaim/Tiṇāṇi
Rajjäim/Rajjaim/Rajjāņi
Māyā/Māyāu/Māyāo
Kaha/Kahau/Kahāo Sikkha/Sikkhau/Sikkhão
Påla = Cara To graze
=
Jāņa To understand
=
=
To nurture
The king salutes Gods (Siddhas).
The state protects the Kings.

117

Page #141

Máyä
Narinda/ Narinde
Panamai) = The mother salutes Panamadi/etc. the kings.
(Present Tense)
a-ending Neuter (Accusative Plural) Tiņāim/Tiņāini Tiņāņi
Karaho
Carai/ Caradi/etc.
- The camel grazes (different types of) grass.
Narindo
Rajjäim/Rajjāiṁ/ Rajjani
Rakkhai/ Rakkhadi/etc.
- The king protects
the states.
Māya
Bhoyaņaim/Bhoyaņāiń Bhoyaņāņi
Khāi The mother eats Khadi/etc. (different types of) food.
å-ending Feminine
(Accusative Plural) (Present Tense) Narindo Maya/Mayau/ Panamai Mayão
Panamadi/etc.
: The king salutes
the mothers.
Rajjam
Sikkhå/Sikkhául Sikkhảo
Jāņai) Jāņadi/etc.
= The state understands
(types of) education.
Maya
Kahå/Kahau/
Sunai/ Sunadi/etc.
• The mother hears
stories.
Kahảo
(iv)
Personal Pronoun (Accusative (Present Tense) Plural)
Tumhe/Tujjhed Panamami/etc. :I salute you all,
Aham/Ham Ammi
Tubbhe/Bhe
• You bring up all.
Tumam/Tum/ Amhe/Amha/Ne Palasi/etc. Tuha
118
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #142

So
Sä
Så
1.
2 3 4
4.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
ૐ
Te/Tå
Tȧ/Tau/Tão
Taim/Taim/Tāņi

Jāņai/etc. = He knows them.
Jānai/etc. - She knows them. Rakkhai/etc. She protects them.
For the construction of Accusative Case Plural Number from the 'a'-ending Masculine Nouns, Zero suffix is added to them. After adding Zero suffix a is changed into ȧ and e. Narinda→Narindā, Narinde. For the construction of Accusative Case Plural Number from the 'a'-ending Neuter Nouns, 'im', ‘im' and ni suffixes are added to them and after adding them a is changed into ā. Rajja→Rajjāiṁ/Rajjāiṁ/Rajjāņi. For the construction of Accusative Case Plural Number from the 'a'-ending Feminine Nouns, Zero, u, 'o'. are added to them as Mayȧ→Māyā/Māyȧu/ Mãyão.
The construction of Accusative Case Plural Number from the First Person Pronoun (Amhe) will be: Amhe/Amha/Ne
The construction of Accusative Case Plural Number from the Second Person Pronoun (Tumeh) will be: Tumhe/Tujjhe/Tubbhe/Bhe
The construction of Accusative Case Plural Number from the Third Person Pronoun (Ta, Tả)will be: Te, Tȧ (Masculine)
Taim/Taim/Tāņi (Neuter)
Ta/Tau/Tão (Feminine)
All the above Verbs are Transitive.
All the above sentences are in the Active Voice.
The Present Tense sentences are given above. The sentences of the Future Tense, Past Tense and Imperative in the Accusative Case Plural should be constructed. After using Nominative Case Plural in place of Nominative Case Singular the sentences in all the Tenses should be constructed.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

119

Page #143

Lesson 53 Transitive Verbs
Exercises Use the following Transitive Verbs in the Active Voice. This use should be in the Present Tense, Past Tense, Future Tense and Imperative. Acca : To worship
Garaha : To blame Rokka - To withhold
Gavesa : To search out,
To discover Ugghada = To uncover Cakkha = To taste Uvayara - To help
Ciņa - To pick Uppáďa - To uproot
Coppada = To oil Kațţa : To cut, To saw Chaqda - To renounce Kalanka - To stigmatise Chala = To cheat, To dupe Kokka - To invite, To call Chuva = To touch Khaņa - To dig
Dekkha = To see Choda - To give up
Dhoa - To wash Cholla - To peel
Pisa - To grind Jima = To partake of food Pukkara - To shout, To call Dhakka - To cover
Phada - To tear Toda: To break
Kuţta To thresh
Translate the following sentences into Prāksta :(A) (1) The father blames the son. (2) The grandfather calls the grandson. (3) God sees the world. (4) Husband's younger brother washes the cloth. (5) The king should renounce pride. (6) The friend should call him. (7) Ráma should worship God. (8) The dog withholds the demon. (9) The king discovers the jewels. (10) Men give up vows. (11) He cheats the child. (12) You see the lion. (13) I touch him. (14) They stigmatise him. (15) He tears the cloths. (16) Suffering withholds pleasure. (17) The friend sees lions. (18) The maternal uncle
120
Prakyta Grammar and Composition

Page #144

touches the religious books. (19) Hanumāna helps him. (20) We cover the sun.
(B) (1) He will dig the field. (2) You will partake of food. (3) He should peel the wood. (4) He should give up addiction. (5) You should taste milk. (6) They will cut the small bundle. (7) We shall thresh rice. (8) They will saw the forest. (9) He grinds seeds.
(C) (1) Ráma calls Sitä. (2) I call the daughter. (3) The woman digs the pitch. (4) The sister sees the daughters. (5) The girl uncovers the small water pitcher. (6) The wife covers the ditch. (7) We worship the Ganges. (8) Hunger wilhholds thirst. (9) Desire with-holds sleep. (10) He/She should renounce wine.
(D) (1) He dug the field. (2) You called the girl. (3) He washed cloths. (4) They cut the small bundle. (5) We threshed rice.
- 3.
Translate the following sentences into Prákştä by using the special types (Chapter 51.5) of Transitive Verbs. Use all the alternatives. (A) (1) I/you hear the story. (2) I/you go to the village. (3) I/you forsake addictions. (4) I know you. (5) I/you see him. (6) 1/ you eat food.
(B) (1) He hears the story. (2) He goes to the village. (3) He sees you. (4) He eats food. (5) They see him. (6) They eat food.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
121

Page #145

Lesson 54
Transitive Verbs (use in the Active Voice and the
Passive Voice)
Transitive Verbs
Kokka = To call
Dekkha = To see
Rakkha To protect
=
Suņa
= To hear
Panama = To salute, To greet Påla = To nurture, To bring up
The above Verbs are Transitive. The Transitive Verbs are used in the Active and Passive Voice. For forming the Passive Voice from the Transitive Verbs, same suffixes as were used for forming the Impersonal form are added [Lesson 47- 'ijja', ia (iya)]. The subject is changed into the Instrumental (Singular or Plural). The object instead of being in the Accusative case (Singular or Plural), is changed into the Nominative Case (Singular or Plural). After adding the suffixes of the Passive Voice to the Verb, suffixes of the Tense are added to the Verb according to the Number and Person of the object converted into the Nominative Case. The Passive Voice is formed from the Transitive Verbs in the Present Tense, Past Tense and the Imperative. In the Future Tense the Active Voice form of the Future Tense Verbal form continues and 'ijja', ia and 'iya' suffixes are not added to the Future Tense Verbal form. In the Past Tense, the Past Participle is used in the Passive Voice also. Here for the construction of the Passive Voice, only the use of Instrumental Singular is given. The Instrumental Plural should also be used. In the previous chapters we have already dealt with a-ending Masculine and Neture Genders and we have dealt with ã-ending Feminine Nominative Case. Accusative Case and Instrumental Case. In this chapter we shall be dealing with i-ending and u-ending Masculine forms in Nominative Case Singular and Instrumental Case Singular.
122

Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #146

Nouns
i-ending Masculine
u-ending Masculine
SubjectNominative
Narindo
Narindo
Narindo
Narindo
Narindo
Narindo
Aham/Ham/
Ammi

Tam
Mamam/Mam/Mi
Tam
Nouns
Active Voice
Present Tense Singular Number
ObjectAccusative
Tumam/Tum
Tam
Hari = Hari
Sami = Master
Kai = Poite
Kaham
Sähu= Saint
Jantu = Being
Sattu = Enemy
Tumam/Tum/ Tam
Tumam/Tum
Tuha
Prǎkrta Grammar and Composition
Nominative
Singular
Hari
Sami
Kai
Sähü
Jantů
Sattů
Verb-according
to the Subject
Kokkai/etc. The king
calls me.
Kokkai/etc. The king calls you.
Kokkai/etc. The king
calls him.
=
=
Instrumental
Singular
Hariņā
Samiņā
Kaina
=
Sähunȧ
Jantunā
Sattuna

Kokkai/etc. The king
calls her.
Rakkhai/etc. The king
protects that (state).
Sunai/etc. = The king
hears the story.
Dekkhami/etc. = I see you.
Dekkhasi/etc. You see him/
her.
=
123

Page #147

So
Så
Maya
Māyā
SubjectInstrumental
Narindena/
Narindenam
Narindena/
Narindenam
Narindena/
Narindeṇam
Narindena/
Narindenam
Narindena/
Narindenam
Narindena/
Narindenam
Mai/Mae/
Me/Mamae
Tai/Tae/ Tume/Tumae
124

Mamam/Mam/Mi
Mamam/Mam/Mi Mamam/Mam/Mi
Tumam/Tum
Passive Voice
Present Tense Singular Number
Object
Ammi
Tuha
So
Sã
Nominative to the Nominative
Aham/Ham/
Tam
Dekkhai/etc. = He sees me.
Dekkhai/etc. She sees me.
Palai/etc. The mother
Kahā
Pălai/etc.
Tumam/Tum/ Kokkijjasi/Kokkiasi/etc. -You are called by the king.
Tuha
So/Sã
=
=
Verb-according
brings me up.
The mother
brings you up.
Kokkijjami/Kokkiami/etc.
-I am called by the king.
Kokkijjai/Kokkiai/etc.
= He is called by the king.
Kokkijjai/Kokkiai/etc.
1=1
= She is called by the king.
Rakkhijjai/Rakkhiai/etc.
= That (state) is protected by the king.
Tumam/Tum/ Dekkhijjasi/Dekkhiasi/etc. - You are seen by me.
Suņijjai/Suņiai/etc.
-The story is heared by the king.
Dekkhijjai/Dekkhiai/etc. He/She is seen by you.

Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #148

Tena/Tenam
Ahas/Har/ Dekkhijjami/Dekkhiami/etc. Ammi
I am seen by him.
Tăe/Tai/Tāa
Aham/Har/ Dekkhijjami/Dekkhiami/etc. Ammi
= I am seen by her.
Māyae/Máyki/Māyāa Aham/Ham/ Pālijjami/Pāliami/etc.
Ammi lam brought up by the mother.
Māyae/Māyai/Māyāa
Tumam/Tum/ Pälijjasi/Paliasi/etc. Tuha : You are brought up by the mother.
Active Voice Present Tense Singular Number Object
Verb-according Accusative
to the Subject
Subject Nominative
Maya
Tam
Hari
Mamam/Mam/Mi
Hari
Tumam/Tum
Hari
Tam
Palai/etc. = The mother
brings him/
her up. Panamai/etc. - Hari salutes
me. Panamai/etc. = Hari salutes
you. Panamai/etc. - Hari salutes
him. Kokkai/etc. = The saint calls
me. Kokkai/etc. The saint calls
you. Kokkai/etc. The saint calls
him. Suņai/etc. The saint hears
the story.
Sahu
Mamam/Mam/Mi
Şahů
Tumam/Tum
Sahu
Tam
Sahů
Kaham
Praksta Grammar and Composition
125

Page #149

Subject Nominative
Present Tense Plural Number Object
Verb-according Accusative
to the Subject
Narindo
Amhe/Amha/ge
Narindo
Tumhe/Tujjhel Tubbhe/Bhe Te/Tå
Kokkai/etc. : The king
calls us. Kokkai/etc. = The king
calls you all. Kokkai/etc. - The king
calls them. Kokkai/etc. = The king
Narindo
Narindo
Tá/Tạo/Tàu
calls them.(Fem.)
Passive Voice Present Tense Singular Number
Subject Object Instrumental Nominative
Verb-according to the Nominative
Māyāe/Māyāi/ So/Sā
Palijjai/Pāliai/etc.
- He/She is brought up by the mother.
Māyāa
Hariņa
Aham/Ham/ Ammi
Paņamijjami/Paņamiami/etc.
= I am saluted by Hari.
Harina
Tumam/Tum/ Paṇamijjasi/Paņamiasi/etc. Tuha
= you are saluted by Hari.
Hariņā
So/Sa
Paņamijjai/Paņamiai/etc.
- He/She is saluted by Hari.
Sähuna
Aham/Har/ Ammi
Kokkijjami/Kokkiami/etc.
- I am called by the saint.
126
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #150

Sähuṇā
Sähuṇā
Sähunā
Narindena
Narindena
Narindena
Narindena
Note. (i)
(ii)
Tumam/Tum/ Kokkijjasi/Kokkiasi/etc.
Tuha

So/Sã
Kahā
Subject
Object
Instrumental Nominative to the Nominative
Amhe/
Vayam
Te
= you are called by the by saint.
Kokkijjai/Kokkiai/etc.
Tå/
Tau/Tão
Present Tense Plural Number
Verb-according
He/She is called by the saint.
Suņijjai/Suņiai/etc.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
The story is heared by the saint.
Tubbhe/
Kokkijjaha/Kokkiaha/etc.
Tumhe/Tujjhe = You (all) are called by the king.
Kokkijjamo/Kokkiamo/etc.
= We are called by the king.
=
Kokkijjanti/Kokkianti/etc.
They are called by the king.
Kokkijjanti/Kokkianti/etc.
= They (Fem.) are called by the king.
In other sentences also Accusative Plural in the Active Voice may be used.
For constructing the Passive Voice in the Past Tense and the Imperative, the suffixes of the Past Tense and the Imperative are added after adding the suffixes of the Passive Voice to Verbs (in three Persons and both Numbers).

127

Page #151

1.
In the above sentences, i-ending and u-ending Masculine Nouns have been used in the Nominative Singular and Instrumental Singular. (i) For constructing the Nominative Singular from
i- ending Masculine Nouns add 'zero'suffixes. After adding 'zero'suffix i is changed into i. As Hari-Hari and for constructing the Instrumental Singular ‘ņå', is added, as, Hari-Hariņa. For constructing the Nominative Singular from the u-ending Masculine Nouns, add 'zero' suffix. After adding 'zero' suffix u is changed into ú. as- Sāhu-Sáhū and for constructing the Instrumental Singular ‘ņa', suffix is added,
as, Sähů - Sāhună. All the above verbs are Transitive. For constructing and Nominative Plural and the Instrumental Plural from i-ending and u-ending Masculine Nouns, the Inflexion is as followes. Nominative Plural - Hari - Hari/Harau/Harao/Harino. (zero-i, au, ao, no) Sāhu - Sāhū/Sähau/Sähao/Sāhavo/Sāhuņo (zero-ū, au, ao,
avo, no) Instrumental Plural - Hari - Harihi/Harihim/Harihiñ/(After adding hi/him/hin i is changed into i. Såhu - Sāhūhi/Sāhūhim/Sāhūhis/(After adding hi/him/hiń u is changed into ů.
2.
128
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #152

Lesson 5 5
Noun
Transitive Verbs 'i'-ending Nouns
(2) (Masculine Gender)
(1)
'u'-ending Nouns (Masculine Gender)
Sami = Owner, Master. Kai - Poet Kari - Elephant Muņi -Saint Jogi = Ascetic
Pai - Husband
Sasi = Moon
Hatthi = Elephant
Påņi = Being Ravi - Sun Manti - Minister or Secretary
Kesari - Lion
Jantu : Being Bandhu - Brother Maccu - Death Bindu - Drop Riu - Enemy Sattu - Enemy Guru = Teacher Suņu = Son Dhaņu - Bow Taru : Tree Teu : Radiance Kareņu - Elephant Sisu =Child/Son Pahu : God Meru - Meru
Mountain Pharasu • Axe Vẫu : Air Såhu - Saint Rahu-Rama (Raghu) Seu - Bridge Piu - Father Jambu - Jāmuna Jamău - Son-in-law
Giri = Mountain
Risi : Saint
Jai : Saint Tavassi : Mortifier Naravai : King Seņávai = Commander Ari - Enemy Vihi : Law, Rule
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
129

Page #153

(3)
(Transitive Verbs)
Bolla - To speak Padha - To read Bhaņa - To say Kaha = To say Muņa - To know Ņama - To salute
Jema - To partake of food Khả - To eat Pib/Pia - To drink
Iccha = To desire
Vakkhāņa - To lecture Sumara - To remember Ranga = To colour Cúra - To break Coråva - To thieve Oñanda = To welcome,
To greet Le - To take Vaha = To hold Viņņa - To know Maila - To dirty Da - To give Sinca = To irrigate Thuņa - To pray Bandha = To tie Cinta - To worry, To think Magga - To demand Hirnsa : To injure Asa - To eat Mára = To kill Ga = To sing Damsa = To sting
Dhåra = To hold Peccha - To see Liha - To write Hana - To kill Pida = To oppress Kara - To do Jaņa - To produce Cava - To speak Ņisuņa - To hear Cua - To renounce Vaņņa - To describe Seva - To serve Vaddhåva - To congratulate
130
Prákrta Grammar and Composition

Page #154

Lesson 5 6
Exercises
Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta:
(A)
(1) Food is eaten by the owner. (2) The vow is observed by the poet. (3) Water is drunk by the elephant. (4) You are cheated by the enemy. (5) We are seen by God. (6) All of you are sent by the saint. (7) He is prayed by the mother. (8) I am remembered by the guru. (9) We are congratulated by the friend. (10) The wealth is demanded by him.
(B)
(1) I should be called by the brother. (2) Wood should be coloured by him. (3) The song should be sung by the poet. (4) A letter should be written by me. (5) We should be sent by the father. (6) You should be saluted by the sister. (7) All of you should be served by the saint. (8) They should be seen by me. (9) He should be prayed by you. (10) I should be tied by you.
(C)
(1) I am killed by enemies. (2) Suffering should be known by us. (3) God should be prayed by women. (4) Food will be eaten by the child. (5) The song should be sung by poets. (6) Religious books will be heard by the yogis. (7) You will be called by the father. (8) We shall be remembered by the mortifier. (9) Vows will be held by him. (10) He should be saluted by the minister.
(D)
(1) He was killed by the enemy. (2) Suffering was known by us. (3) Food was eaten by children. (4) You were sent by the saint. (5) God was prayed by the woman.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

131

Page #155

Lesson 57
Past Participle (Use in the Passive Voice)
For expressing the purport of the Past Tense, the Past Participle is also used in Prākṛta. The Past Participle is formed by adding the suffix of the Past Participle to the Verb (See Lesson 42). The Past Participles partake of the nature of an Adjectives. When the suffixes of the Past Participle are added to the Transitive Verbs, it is used only in the Passive Voice. For making the Passive Voice, the subject in the Nominative Case is changed into the Instrumental Case (Singular or Plural). The object which occurs in the Accusative Case (Singular or Plural) is changed into the Nominative Case and the inflexion of the Past Participle is according to the object converted in the Nominative Case. The inflexion of the Past Participle is like 'Deva' in the Masculine Gender, like 'Kamala in the Neuter Gender and like 'Kaha' in the Feminine Gender. The Past Participle is 'a-ending'. For changing it into the Feminine Gender, a-suffix is added to it.
Transitive Verb
(i)
Kokka = To call
Dekkha To see
=
Rakkha To protect
Acca - To worship
Narindena/ Kai
Narindenam
Masculine
Narindena/ Kai/Kaau/ Narindenam Kaao/Kaino
Narindehi/
Narindehim/
Narindehim
132

Kai/Kaau/
Kaao/Kaino
= To hear
Suņa Panama = To salute, To greet Påla
Iccha
Kokkito
Past Participle
Kokkio/Kokkido/= The poet was called by the King.
Kokkitä
-
= To nurture, To bring up, To observe, To obey = To desire
Kokkiä/Kokkida/ The poets were called by the King.
Kokkitä
=
=
Kokkia/Kokkida/ The poets were called by the Kings.

Präkṛta Grammar and Composition

Page #156

Harina
Diváyaro
Accio/Accidol = The sun was Accito
worshiped by Hari.
Máyke/Māyāi/ Sähú Máyāa
Dekkhio/Dekkhido/ • The saint was Dekkhito
seen by the mother.
Vayo
Palio/Pálido/
Sáhühi/ Sāhūhim/ Sāhūhis
The vow was observed by saints.
Palito
Neuter
Dhanam
Narindeņa/ Narindenam
Past Participle Icchiam/lcchidam/ - The wealth Icchitam was desired by the king.
Jogihi/ Jogihim/ Jogihis
Paņamiam/ Paņamida Panamita
= Knowledge was
saluted by saints.
Nánar
Rajjena Rajjenam
Sasanam
Rakkhiam/ Rakkhidam/ Rakkhitam
= The government
was protected by the state.
Sūņūhi Süņühiṁ Suņühis
Sokkhāim/Sokkháin
Sokkhāņi
Icchiaiṁ/lcchiaiṁ/ Pleasures were Icchiani
desired by sons.
Feminine
(iii) Narindeņa/ Narindeņam
Pasamsa
Past Participle Suņiä/Suņidá/ - Praise was Suņită
heared by the king.
Senavainä
Saria
Dekkhia/Dekkhida/ = The river was Dekkhita seen by the commander.
Praksta Grammar and Composition
133

Page #157

Bandhuṇā
1.
Mãyãe/Mäyǎi/ Kaha/Kahau Suņiă/Suņiau/
Māyāa
Kahão
Sunião/etc.
2.
3.
4. (i)
(ii)
134
Before using the Past Participle in Feminine Gender, it should be changed into Feminine Gender. By adding 'a'-suffix, the Past Participles are changed into Feminine Gender. As for example, Sunia Sunia, Dekkhia Dekkhiä etc.
All the above-mentioned verbs are Transitive.
i-ending Masculine Nominative Plural -
Kai/Kaau/Kaao/Kaino.
u-ending Masculine Nominative Plural - Sähu
Sähů/Sâhau/Sahao/Sahavo/Sāhuno.
(iii) i-ending Masculine Insturmental Plural -
Jogi Jogihi/Jogihim/Jogihim.
(iv) u-ending Masculine Insturmental Plural
Sūņu
Kai
Gangā
→
Panamia/Paṇamida: The Ganges was saluted by the brother.
All the above sentences are of the Passive Voice. In these the Subject is placed in the Instrumental, the object is placed in the Nominative and the Verb is conjugated according to the Person and Number of the Object.

Paṇamitā
―
- Stories were
heared by the mother.
Sünühi/Sünühim/Sūṇühim.

-
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #158

Lesson 5 8
Exercises
Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta:
(A)
(1) The book was read by me. (2) The friend was called by him. (3) The son was sent by the grandfather. (4) Pride was held by the girl. (5) Water was drunk by us. (6) Wells were dug by them. (7) Demons were killed by Rama. (8) Cloths were torn by the child. (9) The commander was killed by the enemy. (10) The saint was prayed by the Guru.
(B)
(1) Food was eaten by the citizen. (2) Milk was drunk by brothers. (3) Karmas were bound by beings. (4) Songs were sung by the poet. (5) Aircrafts were seen by me. (6) Detachment was described by him. (7) Sticks were burnt by me. (8) Addictions were described by you. (9) Papers were written by the brother. (10) The thread was cut by the owner.
(C)
(1) The order was obeyed by him. (2) The story was heard by Rāma. (3) Education was upheld by the saint. (4) The wealth was desired by daughter. (5) Compassion was produced by him. (6) Reputation was heard by the owner. (7) Faith was carried by the saint. (8) The hut was seen by the minister. (9) Wisdom was known by saints. (10) Compassion was observed by saints.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

135

Page #159

Lesson 59 i-ending, u-ending nouns Masculine, Neuter, Feminine Gender
1.
Väri = Water
i-ending nouns (Neuter) Dahi - Curd Acchi - Eye Atthi - Bone
Sali = Rice
Sappi - Clarified Butter
u-ending nouns (Neuter) Mahu - Honey Aṁsu - Tear
Jāņu = Knee Âu - Age Daru = Wood (Stick)
Vatthu : Material, Thing
3.
i-ending nouns (Feminine) Bhatti - Devotion
Uppatti - Birth Maņi - Jewel
Gai : Birth Tatti = Satisfaction
Riddhi - Prosperity Ratti : Night
Juvai - Young woman Dhii - Patience
Satti = Strength Thui - Prayer
Agii - Form Laddhi - Attainment
Jäi : Birth/Caste Ohi/Avahi - Limit of time Mai - Intellect Appaladdhi - Spiritual
attainment
136
Prāksta Grammar and Composition

Page #160

4.
5.
6.
i-ending nouns (Feminine)
Paramesari = Prosperous
Sāmiņi - Mistress Bahiņi = Sister
Piamahi Grandmother Samani Woman Saint
Saḍi Sări/Cloth
Dhatti = Nurse
Mäusi Mother's Sister
=
=
Rajju = Rope
Haņu = Chin
woman
u, u-ending nouns (Feminine)
Dheņu : Cow
Cañcu = Beak
Kaḍacchu Small spoon Tanu = Body
113

i, ü-ending nouns (Masculine) Gamaņi Village headman Khalapú = Cleaner of granary
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
Nai = River
Någari Woman residing
in a city
=
Putti = Daughter Nȧri = Woman
Itthi = Woman
Lacchi = Wealth
Pudhavi = Earth
Janeri Mother
Kandů - Itchiness
Khajjú = Itch
Jambu = Tree of Jamuna Sassů Mother-in-law
Daughter-in-law
Bahu Camů - Army
=
=
Sayambhu Self-made person

=
137

Page #161

Gaccha = To go
Yȧ/Ja = To go
Dhåva = To run
Jha = To meditate
Khama To forgive
Dhikkara = To reproach Raya To make, To create
Gundha: To braid, To weave
together strips
Daha : To burn, To kindle Sikkha To Learn
Bujjha = To understand
Jingha To smell
=
=
=
Cakkha To taste
H
Lesson 60
Transitive Verbs
138

=
Påva = To get Nirakkha To see Bhunja To eat Kuppa To anger Cava To chew
=
=
=
Daha
To burn
-
Vacca = To go
Agaccha = To come
-
Liha To lick
Gåa = To sing
Gana To count
=
Khiva To throw
Khanda = To break into
pieces
Kina = To buy
Labha To obtain, To take
Vanda = To salute
Khimsa = To criticise,
To blame
Joa To illuminate
Māņa = To honour Rakkha To keep
==
Muna To know
=
=
Cua To renounce Jaya/Jina To win,
=

To conquer
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #162

Lesson 61
i-ending, u-ending nouns
i-ending Masculine
Singular Number Sami
Nominative Case
Sami - Master Plural Number Sāmi/Samau/ Sāmao/Sámiņo Sámihi/Sāmihim/ Sāmihin
Instrumental Case
Samina
i-ending Masculine
Nominative Case
Gåmaņi - Village headman Singular Number Plural Number Gāmaņi
Gamani/Gámaņau/
Gāmaņao/Gamaniņo Gamanina
Gāmaņihi/Gāmaņihim/ Gamaņihiń
Instrumental Case
u-ending Masculine
Singular Number Pahů
Nominative Case
Pahu - God Plural Number Pahü/Pahau/Pahao/ Pahavo/Pahuņo Pahūhi/Pahūhim/ Pahühiń
Instrumental Case
Pahuņā
u-ending Masculine
Nominative Case
Sayambhu - Self-made Person Singular Number Plural Number Sayambhū Sayambhú/Sayambhau/
Sayambhao/Sayambhavo/ Sayambhuņo
Praksta Grammar and Composition
139

Page #163

Instrumental Case
Sayambhuņā
Sayambhūhi/ Sayambhūhim/ Sayambhūhiń
i-ending Neuter
Singular Number
Väri : Water Plural Number Vāriim/Väriiṁ/ Vārini
Nominative Case
Varim
Instrumental Case
Varina
Varihi/Varihim/
Varihim
u-ending Neuter
Singular Number Vatthum
Nominative Case
Vatthu - Material Plural Number Vatthūiṁ/Vatthúis/ Vatthūņi Vatthühi/Vatthūhim Vatthühin
Instrumental Case
Vatthuna
i-ending Feminine
Juvai - Young Lady Plural Number
Singular Number Juvai
Nominative Case
Juvai/Juvaiu/
Instrumental Case
Juvaia/Juvaia/
Juvaio Juvaihi/Juvaihim Juvaihin
Juvaji/Juvaie
i-ending Feminine
Lacchi : Wealth
Singular Number Lacchi/Lacchia
Nominative Case
Plural Number Lacchi/Lacchiu/ Lacchio/Lacchia/ Lacchihi/Lacchihim Lacchihiṁ
Instrumental Case
Lacchia/Lacchia/
Lacchii/Lacchie
140
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #164

u-ending Feminine
Nominative Case Instrumental Case
ü-ending Feminine
Nominative Case
Instrumental Case
a-ending Masculine
Nominative Case
Instrumental Case
a-ending Neuter
Nominative Case
Singular Number
Taṇů
Taṇua/Taņūā/
Taṇui/Taṇue

Singular Number
Camů
Camua/Camūā/ Camui/Camue
Singular Number
Narindo
The Inflexion of a-ending Masculine, a-ending Neuter and ǎ-ending Feminine should be understood in the following way.
Narindena/ Narindeṇam
Singular Number Kamalam
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
Taņu = Body Plural Number
Tanu/Tanuu/Tanuo
Tanúhi/Tanūhim/

Taṇühim
Camů = Army
Plural Number
Camu/Camuu/
Camuo
Camuhi/Camühim/
Camühim
Narinda King
Plural Number
Narindă
(Lesson 31, 32)
=
Narindehi/
Narindehim/
Narindehim
(Lesson 45)
Kamala Lotus Flower
Plural Number
Kamaläim/
Kamalāim/
Kamalāņi
(Lesson 35, 36)
=
141

Page #165

Instrumental Case
Kamalena/ Kamalenam
Kamalehi/ Kamalehim/ Kamalehiń (Lesson 45)
å-ending Feminine
Singular Number
Nominative Case
Sasā
Sasa - Sister Plural Number Saså/Sasko/Sasáu (Lesson 39,40) Sasahi/Sasāhim/ Sasahin (Lesson 45)
Instrumental Case
Saska/Saski/Sasie
First Person
Nominative Case
Personal Pronoun
Amha = 1 Singular Number Plural Number Aham/Ham/Ammi Amhe/Vayam
(Lesson 1,5) Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae Amhehi/Amhāhi
(Lesson 45)
Instrumental Case
Second Person
Nominative Case
Tumha : You Singular Number Plural Number Tumam/Tum/Tuha Tubbhe/Tumhel
Tujjhe
(Lesson 2, 6) Tai/Tae/Tume/Tumae Tubbhehim/
Instrumental Case
Tumhehim/
Tujjhehim (Lesson 45)
142
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #166

Third Person
Ta = He (Masculine), Ta = She (Feminine) Plural Number
Singular Number
Nominative Case
So
Te
Sa
Instrumental Case
Tena/Tenam Tāe/Tai/Taa
Tä/Tão/Tàu (Lesson 3, 7) Tehi/Tehim/Tehis Tähi/Tāhim/Tahin (Lesson 45)
Praksta Grammar and Composition
143

Page #167

Lesson 6 2
Obligatory and Potential Participle'(Its use in the Passive Voice)
For expressing the purport of 'should be got', 'should be protected' etc.' Obligatory and Potential Participle is used in Praksta. This Participle is formed by adding the following suffixes to the Verbs. avva, yavva, tavva, davva (ņiya). (See Lesson 49). For using this Participle in Passive Voice, the subject is changed into the Instrumental Case (Singular or Plural), the object is changed into the Nominative Case (Singular or Plural) and the Participle is inflected according to the Gender and Number of the changed object in the Nominative Case. In the Masculine Gender, the inflection will be according to 'Deva', in the Neuter Gender the inflection will be according to 'Kamala' and in the Feminine Gender the inflexion will be according to 'Kahā'. Obligatory and Potential Participle used in the Passive Voice is formed from the Transitive Verbs. Transitive Verbs - Kiņa - To buy Rakkha : To protcet Labha To obtain Jháa = To meditate Khama - To forgive Pia (Piba) -To drink Gana - To count Peccha : To see Dhåra To carry Pesa - To send Bandha - To tie
(i) Instrumental Masculine
Gender Samina
Hatthi
Obligatory and Potential Participle Kiņiavvo/Kiņidavvo/ - An elephant Kiņitavvo/Kiņaņiyo/ should be Kiņeavvo/Kiņedavvo/ purchased Kinetavvo
by the master.
1
This Participle is also called : (a) Obligatory and Potential Participle Passive Participle (b) Future Passive Participle (C) Gerundives.
144
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #168

Muņihi/ Muņihim/ Munihin
Påņi/Pāņau, Rakkhiavva/Rakkhidavvá/ - Beings Panao/Pāņiņo Rakkhitavvå/Rakkhaniyål should be Rakkheavvåletc.
protected
saints.
Såhuna
Teu
Labhiavvo/Labhidavvo/ Labhitavvo/Labhaņiyo/ Labheavvo/etc.
• Radiance
should be obtainted by the saint.
Тей
Sähūhi/ Sähühim/ Şahühiń
Labhiavvo/Labhidavvo/ Labhitavvo/Labhaņiyol Labheavvo/etc.
- Radiance should be obtainted by saints.
Risina
Pahu
Jhaiavvo/Jhäidavvo/ Jhaitavvo/Jhaaņiyol Jhảeavvo/etc.
- God
should be meditated by the saint.
Mai/ Mael Me/ Mamae
Sattu/Sattau Khamiavvå/Khamidavvål - Enemies Sattao/ Khamaņiya/Khameavvaletc. should be Sattavo/
forgiven Sattuno
by me.
Neuter Gender Vārim
Samiņā
Obligatory and Potential Participle Pibiavvas/Pibidavvam/ Pibitavvaṁ/Pibaniyam/ Pibeavvam/etc.
- Water should be drunk by the master.
ai/
Mai/ Mael Me/
Acchiiṁ/ Acchiiñ/ Acchini
Gaņiavvāim/Gaņiavväiñ/ Gaņiavvåņi/Gaạidavväim/ Gaņidavväiń/Ganidavvāņi/ etc.
Eyes should be counted by me.
Mamae
Praksta Grammar and Composition
145

Page #169

Sähühi/
Sähūhim/ Vatthum
Sähūhim
Sähuṇā
(iii)
Puttihi/
Puttihim/
Puttihim
Puttia/
Puttiä/
Puttii/
Puttie
Juvaia/
Juvaia/
Juvaii/
Juvaie
Juvaihi/
Juvaihim/
Juvaihim
Camua/
Camúȧ/
Camui/
Camúe
146

Vatthūim/ Pecchiavvaim/Pecchiavvaiṁ/ = Things Vatthūim/ Pecchiavvani/Pecchaitvvăim/ should be Pecchitvvaim/Pecchitavvāņi/
Vatthūni
seen by the
saint
Sådi/
Sădia
Dhii
Pecchiavvam/Pecchidavvaṁ/ = The thing Pecchitavvam/Pecchaṇiyaṁ/
should be
Feminine
Gender
Lacchi/
Lacchiu/
Lacchio/
Lacchia
Mani/ Maṇau/
Manao
Peccheavvaṁ/etc.
Taṇū
etc.
Obligatory and Potential
Participle
Labhiavvȧ/
Labhiavvão/
Labhiavvǎu/etc.
Kiniavva/
Kinidavva/ Kinitavva/etc.
Dhariavvȧ/
Dharidavva/
Dharitavvȧ/etc.
Pesiavvä/
Pesiavvão/
Pesiavvȧu/etc.
Bandhiavvȧ/Bandhidavva/
Bandhitavva/Bandhaniyȧ/
Bandheavvȧ/etc.
18

seen by
saints.
=
Wealths
should be
obtained by daughters.
The sāḍī
=
should be
Purchase by the daughter.
Patience
should be
carried by
the woman.
= Jewels
should be sent
by women.
- The body
should be
tied by the
army.
Prákṛta Grammar and Composition

Page #170

Camuhi Camûhim/ Camūhir
Taņúl Taņuu/ Taņūo
Bandhiavvå/Bandhiavvau/ Bandhiavvão/etc.
Bodies should be tied by armies.
All the Verbs are Transitive The Obligatory and Potential Participle is used in the Passive Voice and in the Impersonal Form. It is not used in the Active Voice. By Intransitive Verbs, the Impersonal Forms are constructed (lesson 49) and by Transitive Verbs, the Passive Voice is constructed Other Used Nouns Masculine Muņi = Saint
Risi - Saint Hatthi - Elephant
Sähu Saint Sattu - Enemy
Påņi - Being
Neuter Acchi - Eye
Vatthu - Thing
Feminine Dhii = Patience Satti = Strength
Maņi - Jewel Putti = Daughter
Transitive Verbs Kiņa - To purchase Labha = To take Khama = To forgive Gaņa =To count Dhåra : To carry Bandha - To tie
Rakkha: To protect Jhảa = To meditate Piba = To drink Peccha : To see Pesa = To send
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
147

Page #171

Lesson 63
Exercises Translate the following sentences into Prăkrta
(A)
(1) The tree should be irrigated by brother. (2) Saints should be invited by Raghu. (3) Songs should be sung by poets. (4) The lion should be killed by an elephant. (5) The sun should be prayed by the saint.
(B)
(1) Curd should be eaten by me. (2) Water should be drunk by us. (3) Bones should be seen by them. (4) Things should be described by you. (5) Age should be seen by him.
(C) (1) Prosperity should be obtained by you. (2) Satisfaction should be demanded by him. (3) Jewels should be carried by the earth. (4) Devotion should be performed by the young woman. (5) Sáris should be purchased by the maternal aunt. (6) The rope should be threaded by you. (7) Cows should be brought up by him. (8) The Jamuna tree should be irrigated by us. (9) Daughters-in-law should be forgiven by mothers-in-law. (10) Grass should be burnt by you.
148
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #172

Lesson 64
Different Participles (With object in the Accusative Case)
Present Participle
Infinitive
Absolutive (Action completed in the Past)
(i) For expressing the purport of eating food', 'going to the village' etc. in Praksta, the Present Participle is used with object in the Accusative Case. (ii) For expressing the purport of 'for eating food', 'for going to the village' etc. the Infinitive is used with object in the Accusative Case and (iii) For expressing the purport of 'having eaten food', 'having gone to the village' etc. the Absolutive is used with object in the Accusative Case. These Participles are formed from the Verbs. The Present Participle partakes of the nature of an Adjective. The other two (Infinitive and Absolutive) partake of the nature of Indeclinables. These three retain the power of a Verb. Thus, when they are formed from the Transitive Verbs, they take an object in the Accusative Case. The object is placed in the Accusative Case. (For suffixes see lessons: 28, 29, 43) i, i-ending Masculine
Jai - Saint
Gåmaņi - Village headman
Singular Number Plural Number Accusative Case Jaim
Jai/Jaiņo Accusative Case Gåmanim
Gamani/Gamanino
u, u-ending Masculine
Taru - Tree
Khalapů = Cleaner of granary
Singular Number Plural Number Accusative Case Tarum
Tarü/Taruņo Accusative Case Khalapum
Khalapú/Khalapuņo Prakrta Grammar and Composition
149

Page #173

i, u-ending Neuter
Vari : Water
Accusative Case
Vatthu = Thing Singular Number Plural Number Varim
Váriim/Väriim/
Vāriņi Vatthus
Vatthuis/Vatthüiñ/ Vatthūņi
Accusative Case
i, i-ending Feminine
Tatti = Satisfaction
Lacchi - Wealth
Singular Number
Plural Number
Accusative Case
Tattim
Tatti/Tattiu/
Tattio
Accusative Case
Lacchim
Lacchi/Lacchiu Lacchio/Lacchia
u,ů-ending Feminine
Taņu - Body
Camů = Army
Singular Number Plural Number Accusative Case Tanum
Taņu/Taņuu
Taņúo Accusative Case Camuń
Camů/Camūu/ Camuo
Use in Sentences :
Masculine Aham/ Jaim Har/ Ammi
Kokkanto/
Harisami/
= Calling the saint, I rejoice.
Kokkamano
etc.
so
Gamaņim
Salut
Panamanto/ Panamamaño
Acchai/ etc.
= Saluting the Village headman, he sits.
150
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #174

Tarum
Sincanta/ Sincamaņa
Thakkai/ etc.
: Irrigating the tree, she tires.
Khalapum Kokkiūņa/
etc.
Harisai/ etc.
• Having called
the Cleaner of granary, he rejoices.
Neuter Varim
Utthasi/
Tumam Tum/ Tuha
Pibiúm/ Pibidum
- For drinking water you
etc.
get up.
Vatthum
Kiņium/ Kiņidum
Ujjamai! etc.
- He endeavours
to purchase the thing.
Feminine Lacchim
Aham/ Ham/ Ammi
Cuiūņa/ etc.
Ullasāmi/ etc.
: Having
renounced the wealth, 1 rejoce.
Te
Tanum
:
Rakkhium/ Rakkhidum
Ujjamanti) etc.
endeavour to protect the body.
Camum
Dekkhiúna/
Amhe/ Vayam
Daramo/ etc.
etc.
• Having
seen the army, we fear.
Tattim
Labhiüņa/
Tumam Tum/ Tuha
Naccahi/ etc.
etc.
- Having obtained satisfaction, you dance.
Note: In this way the sentences in Accusative Case Plural should be
constructed.
Prāksta Grammar and Composition
151

Page #175

1.
a-ending Masculine - Neuter and a-ending Feminine have been explained in the previous lessons.
a-ending Masculine
Narinda = King
Plural Number
Singular Number Narindań
Accusative Case
Narinda
a-ending Neuter
Singular Number Rajjar
Rajja - State Plural Number Rajjāim/Rajjāiñ/ Rajjāņi
Accusative Case
å-ending Feminine
Kaha - Story
Plural Number
Singular Number Kaham
Accusative Case
Kaha/Kahāu/Kahảo.
Personal Pronoun (Accusative Case)
Ta - He Ta - She
Amha = 1. Tumha : You,
First Person Second Person
Singular Number Mamam/Mam/Mi Tumañ/Tus
Third Person
Tam Tam
Plural Number Amhe/Amha/Ne Tumhe/Tujjhe! Tubbhe/Bhe Te, Tá (Masculine) Táim/Táis/Tani
(Neuter) Tá/Tàu/Tão
(Feminine).
Tam
152
Präkta Grammar and Composition

Page #176

2.
3.
For constructing the Accusative Case Singular. () is added to the Nouns. After Adding the. () the long ending vowel is changed into short - ending. as Gāmaṇi →Gāmaṇim etc.
The suffixes of the Accusative Plural can be understood from the table of suffixes.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

153

Page #177

Lesson 6 5
Exercises
Translate the following sentences into Práksta -
(A)
(1) Greeting Raghupati, the master gets up. (2) Saluting the guru, the poet sits. (3) Reproaching him, the brother embarrasses. (4) The lion, killing an elephant fears. (5) Listening to the saints, he shines. (6) Eating curd, he sleeps. (7) Drinking water, you dance. (8) Seeing the fire, we turn. (9) Serving the village headman, he tires. (10) Tasting honey, he rejoices.
(B) (1) For doing devotion, he gets up. (2) You endeavour to get satisfaction. (3) For saying the daughter, he enthuses. (4) We endeavour to tie the rope. (5) They get up to see cows.
(C) (1) Having greeted Raghupati, the master rejoices. (2) Having saluted the guru, the poet sits. (3) Having done devotion, he lives. (4) Having got satisfaction, you rejoice. (5) Having seen cows, they get up.
154
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #178

Lesson 66
Noun-Pronoun Nouns Dative and Genitive Case Singular Number
Nouns
Dative and Genitive
Case Singular number a-ending Masculine Narinda = King Narindassa/
Narindaya (Only in Dative)
a-ending Neuter
Rajja - State
Rajjassa) Rajjāya (Only in Dative)
å-ending Feminine
Maya - Mother
Mayaa/Mayái/ Māyae
i-ending Feminine
Juvai : Youn
Juvaia/Juvaia/ Juvaii/Juvaie
i-ending Feminine
Putti = Daughter
Puttia/Puttiä/ Puttii/Puttie
u-ending Feminine
Dheņu - Cow
Dhenüa/Dhenda/ Dhenùi/Dheņue
ū-ending Feminine
Jambu : Tree of
Jambua/Jambua/
Jamuna
Jambùi/Jambue
Pronoun Dative and Genitive Case Singular number
Mama/Maham/Majjha - My/For me Tujjha/Tumham/Tuha: Your/For you Tåsa/Tassa/Se His/For him (Masculine or Neuter) Tisså/Tása/$e/Taal = Her/For her (Feminine) Tải/Tie
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
155

Page #179

Instransitive Verbs Hasa = To laugh Jagga = To wake up Vaddha - To increase Ņijjhara - To drop
Transitive Verbs Rakkha : To protect Iccha = To desire Gaccha - To go Kokka To call
Genitive Case Singular Narindassa
Putto
Hasai/etc.
The son of the king laughs.
Rajjassa
Sāsaņam Tam Rakkhai/etc. =The government of
the state protects him.
Mayaa Mặvải Mayae
Sasā
Jaggai/etc.
= The mother's sister wakes up.
Juvaia Juvaia Juvaii Juvaie
Maya
Jaggai/etc.
= The mother of the
young woman wakes up.
Puttia Puttiä Puttii Puttie
Dhanam
Vaddhai/etc. = The wealth of the
daughter increases.
Dhenia - Dheņuá Dheņui Dheņue
Khiram
Nijjharai/etc. - The milk of the
cow drops.
156
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #180

Jambua
Jambūā
Jambui
Jambüe
Mama
Maham
Majjha
Tujjha
Tumham
Tuha
Täsa
Tassa
Se
Tissa/Tasa/.
Se/Taa/
Tai/Tȧe
Dative Case
Singular
So
Āů Vaddhai/etc,
Putto Sokkham
Potto Gharam
Putto Mamaṁ

Putto Tumaṁ
Narindassa/ Gantham Narindȧya
Parikkhaa/ Gantham
Tumam Parikkhai/
Parikkhae
- The age of the tree of Jamuna increases.
Icchai/etc. My son desires pleasure.
Gacchai/etc. Your grandson
goes to home.
Kokkai/etc.
Kokkai/etc.
= His son calls me.
=
Her son calls you.
Kinai/etc. He purchases
the book for the king.

Padhasi/etc. = You read
the book
for the
examination.
Note. In this way, other sentences of the Dative Case are to be
constructed.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
157

Page #181

Lesson 67
Noun Nouns Dative and Genitive Case Singular Number
Nouns
Dative and Genitive
Case Singular Number i-ending Masculine Sámi - Master Sāmiņo/Sāmissa
i-ending Masculine
Gåmanino/
Gamaņi : Village
headman
Gåmanissa
u-ending Masculine
Sähu - Saint
Sāhuņo/Såhussa
ů-ending Masculine
Sayambhú - Self-made Sayambhuņo/
Sayambhussa
person
i-ending Neuter
Vari - Water
Vārino/Varissa
u-ending Neuter
Vatthu : Thing
Vatthuno/Vatthussa
Intransitive Verbs Gala = To Vanish Cua = To drop
Fura = To appear Jagga To wake up
Transitive Verbs Kara = To do, To get Padha = To read
Genitive Case Singular Sámiņo/ Gavvo Sämissa
Galai/ etc.
- The pride of the master vanishes.
Putto
Gámaniņo/ Gåmanissa
Ganthaṁ Padhai/etc. = The son of the
village headman reads the book.
158
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #182

Såhuno/
Sähussa/
Sayambhuṇo/ Putto Sayambhussa
Värino/
Värissa
So
Dative Case
Singular
Aham
Tumam
Teū
So
Furai/etc.
Bindů Cuai/etc.
Vatthuno/ Nāṇam Karai/etc.
Vatthussa
Samino/
Samissa
Jaggai/etc.
Prákṛta Grammar and Composition

= The radiance of the saint appears.
- The son of
Sayambhu wakes up.
= The drop of water drips.
= He gets knowledge of the thing.
Jägarami/etc. = I wake up for
the master.
Såhuno/ Bhoyaṇam Icchasi/etc. You desire food Såhussa for the saint.

=
Gamaniņo/ Gāmaṁ Gacchai/etc. He goes to the Gȧmanissa
village for the
village headman.
=
Note - In this way, other sentences are to be constructed.
159

Page #183

Lesson 68
Noun - Pronoun Nouns Dative and Genitive Case Plural Number Nouns
Dative and Genitive
Case Plural Number a-ending Masculine Narinda = King Narindana/
Narindānam
a-ending Neuter
Rajja - State
Rajjāņa/Rajjānam
a-ending Feminine
Maya - Mother
Máyaņa/Māyānam
i-ending Feminine
Juvai - Young lady
Juvaiņa/Juvaiņam
i-ending Feminine
Putti = Daughter
Puttiņa/Puttīņam
u-ending Feminine
Dheņu = Cow
Dheņuņa/Dheņuņam
Jambúna/Jaíbúnar
ů-ending Feminine Jambů = Tree of
Jamuna Pronoun Dative and Genitive Case Plural
Amhäņa/Amhäņam/Mamaņa/ : For us/Our Mamäņam/Majjhāņa/Majjhāņam Tumaņa/Tuhaņa/Tumhåņam/= For you all/Your Tujjhåņa/Tujjhanam Tesim/Tāņa/Tåņam
: For them/Their (Masculine) Tesim/Taņa/Täņam
• For them/Their (Feminine)
Intransitive Verbs Hasa = To laugh Jagga - To wake up
Transitive Verbs Rakkha = To Protect Iccha - To desire
160
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #184

Vaddha = To grow
Nijjhara To trickle, To drop
=
Genitive Case
Plural
Narindāņa Narindāṇam
Rajjāņa
Mayanam}
Juvaiņa Juvaiņaṁ
Puttina Puttinam
}
Dhenüṇa Dheņūnam
Jaṁbūņa Jambūṇaṁ
Amhȧņa
Amhāņaṁ
Mamȧņa
Mamaņaṁ
Majjhäṇa
Majjhāṇam
}
Puttā

Sasă
Sasana Tam Rakkhanti/etc.=
Māyā
Dhaṇam
Khiram
Aum
Gaccha = To go
Kokka = To call, To invite
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
Hasanti/etc.
Jaggai/etc.
Jaggai/etc.
Vaddhai/etc.
Nijjharai/etc.
Vaddhai/etc.
Putto Sokkham Icchai/etc.
=
=
=
The sons of kings laugh.

The government of
states protects him.
The sister of
mothers wakes up.
The mother of young
women wakes up.
The wealth of
daughters increases.
The milk of cows
drips.
The age of Jämuna
trees increases.
= Our son desires
pleasure.
161

Page #185

Tumȧņa
Tuhaṇa
Tumhāņaṁ
Tujjhāņa
Tujjhāṇam
Tesim
Tāņa
Tāṇaṁ
Tesim
Tāṇa Tāņaṁ
So
Tumam
162
Potto Gharam Gacchai/etc.
Tumam Amhaṇa
Dative Case
Plural
Narindȧņa/
Narindāṇam
Puttå Mamam Kokkanti/etc. =
Parikkhana/ Parikkhaṇam

Puttä Tumam Kokkanti/etc. =
Gantham Kinai/etc.
=
Gantham Padhasi/etc.
Your grandson
goes to the house.
==

Their (Masc.) sons call me.
=
Their (Femi.) sons call you.
He purchases the
book for the king.
Note In the above way, other sentences of the Dative Case are to be constructed.
You read the book
for examinations.
Naccahi/etc. = You dance for us.
Prǎkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #186

Lesson 69
Noun Nouns Dative and Genitive Case Plural
Nouns
Dative and Genitive Case Plural Number Sámiņa/Sāmiņam
i-ending Masculine
Sämi - Master
i-ending Masculine
Gamaņi - Village
headman
Gāmaņiņa/ Gāmaņiņam
u-ending Masculine
Såhu - Saint
Sāhūņa/Sāhūņam
u-ending Masculine
Sayambhu : Self-made Sayambhuna/
person Sayambhūņam
i-ending Neuter
Väri : Water
Värina/Värinam
u-ending Neuter
Vatthu - Thing
Vatthúņa/Vatthūņam
Intransitive Verbs Gala - To Vanish Fura = To appear Cua =To drop Jagga - To wake up
Transitive Verbs Kara - To do, To get Padha - To read Iccha = To desire
Dative and Genitive Plural Såmiņa/ Gavvo Såmiņam
Galai/ etc.
- The pride of masters Vanishes.
Teú
Furai/etc.
Såhūņa/ Sāhūņam
= The radiance of saints appears.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
163

Page #187

So
Nāņam Karai/etc.
Vatthủņa/ Vatthüņam
- He gets knowledge of things.
Aham
Såmiņa/ Såmiņam
Jāgarami/etc.
- I wake up for masters.
Bhoyanam
Tumaṁ Såhúņa/
Såhůņam
Icchasi/ - You desire food etc.
for saints.
164
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #188

Lesson 70
Exercises Translate the following sentences into Prakrta(A) (1) The son of a king greets/should greet/ will greet Rāma. (2) The sister of maternal uncle does/should do/will do pride. (3) The government of the state protects/should protect/will
protect him. (4) Pleasure of Răma is my pleasure/ should be my pleasurel will be my pleasure. (5) The mother of Sitā listens to/should listen to/will listen to
the story. (6) I hear/should hear/shall hear the story of the Ganges. (7) My son desires/should desire/will desire pleasure. (8) His son goes/should go/will go to the house. (9) He drinks/should drink/will drink the water of Narmada. (10) His mother brings/should bring/will bring you up. (B) (1) The son of a king demands/should demand will demand
small bundle for Rāma. (2) He reads/should read/will read his book for examination. (3) My son laughs/should laugh/will laugh for pleasure. (4) He drinks/should drink/will drink water of Narmadā for
the body. (5) The pleasure of Rāma is/ should become/will become the
pleasure for all. (C) (1) The brothers of masters greet him. (2) The gurus of poets see us. (3) The enemies of kings think of fighting. (4) Our gurus partake of food. (5) My maternal aunts purchase sări.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
165

Page #189

Nouns Ablative Case Singular Number
a-ending Masculine
a-ending Neuter
å-ending Feminine
i-ending Feminine
i-ending Feminine
166
Lesson 7 1
Noun Pronoun

Nouns
Narinda King
=
Rajja = State
Måyå = Mother
Putti Daughter
=
Ablative Case
Singular Number
Narindatto/Narindão/
Narindau/Narindāhi/ Narindahinto/Narindā

Rajjatto/Rajjão/ Rajjau/Rajjāhi/ Rajjähinto/Rajjā
Juvai Young woman Juvaia/Juvaia/
Juvaii/Juvaie/
Māyāa/Māyāi/
Māyāe/Māyāhinto/ Mayatto/Māyau/
Māyāo
Juvaitto/Juvaio/ Juvaiu/Juvaihinto
Puttia/Puttiä/
Puttii/Puttie/
Puttitto/Puttio/
Puttiu/Puttihinto
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #190

u-ending Feminine
u-ending Feminine Jambu Tree of
Jāmuna
So
Pronoun
Ablative Case Singular
Dheņu = Cow
Maitto/Mamão/Majjhão/Mamahinto Tumhahinto/Tuvatto/Tuhão/Tumão
Intransitive Verbs
Dara = To fear
Uppajja = To grow
Tão/Tau/Tahinto
Taa/Tai/Tãe/Tatto
Ablative Case
Singular
Narindatto/Narindão/
Narindau/Narindähi/
Narindahinto/Narindă
Māyāa/Māyāi/
Putto Mãyãe/Māyāhinto/ Māyatto/Mayau/Māyāo

Präkrta Grammar and Composition
Dhenua/Dhenüǎ/ Dheṇui/Dheṇue/
Transitive Verbs
Dhava To run
1=
Pada = To fall Nisara = To come out Agaccha = To come
Dheṇutto/Dheṇuo/
Dheṇuu/Dheṇuhinto
Jambua/Jambūā/
Jambui/Jambue/
Jambutto/Jambuo/
Jambuu/Jambůhinto

= From me
- From you
= From him
= From her
Darai/etc. He is afraid of the
king.
Darai/etc. The son is afraid
of mother.
167

Page #191

Maya
Puttia/Puttia/ Puttii/Puttie/ Puttitto/Puttio/ Puttiu/Puttihinto
- The mother reads > Gantham Padhai/etc.
the book from the daughter.
Exercises (1) The child is afraid of the serpent. (2) Food grows from the field. (3) He is afraid of the cow. (4) The Jāmuna falls from the tree of Jamuna. (5) The dog runs from the field. (6) Man should be afraid of Violence. (7) The child falls from the roof of the house. (8) The Ganges flows from the mountain. (9) He is afraid of me.(10) He reads the book from you. (11) A tree grows from the seed. (12) The son hides from father.
The Ablative Case is used :(1). In that in which something is separated from something,
as- Jāmuna falls from the tree. (2). In that from whom somebody desires to hide, as- hides
from the father. (3). In the cause of fear, as- is afraid of the serpent. (4). In that by whom knowledge is acquired, as- I read a
book from you. (5). In the meaning indicative of growing', as- A tree grows
from the seed.
168
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #192

Lesson 72
Noun Ablative Case Singular Number
Nouns
i-ending Masculine
Sami - Master
Ablative Case Singular Sāmiņo/Sāmitto! Sāmio/Samiu/ Sámihinto
u-ending Masculine
Sáhu : Saint
Såhuņo/Sähutto/ Sáhủo/Sāhuu/ Sāhūhinto
i-ending Neuter
Väri : Water
Vārino/Väritto/ Vārio/Vāriu/ Vārihinto
u-ending Neuter
Vatthu - Thing
Vatthuņo/Vatthutto/ Vatthuo/Vatthuu/. Vatthūhinto
Ablative Case Singular Number
So
Såmiņo/Såmitto/ Såmio/Samiu/ Såmihinto
Darai/etc.
: He is afraid of the master.
So
Såhuņo/Såhutto Sähuo/Sähüul Sähühinto
Padhai/etc.
- He learns through the saint.
Variņo/Väritto/ Vario/Väriu/ Värihinto
Pattam Uppajjai/etc.
= The leaf emanates
from water.
Prákyta Grammar and Composition
169

Page #193

Lesson 73
Noun
Ablative Case
Plural Number
Nouns
Ablative Case Plural Number
a-ending Masculine
Narinda = King
Narindatto/Narindão/ Narindau/Narindahi/ Narindahinto/ Narindāsunto/ Narindebi/ Narindehinto/ Narindesunto
i-ending Masculine
Sámi - Master
Sämitto/Samio/ Sámiu/Samihintol Samisunto
u-ending Masculine
Såhu = Saint
Såhutto/Sāhuo/ Såhuu/Sahühinto/ Sähúsunto
a-ending Neuter
Rajja - State
Rajjatto/Rajjão/ Rajjāu/Rajjähi/ Rajjahinto/ Rajjásunto/Rajjehi/ Rajjehinto/Rajjesunto
i-ending Neuter
Väri : Water
Váritto/Värio/Väriu/ Värihinto/Värisunto
u-ending Neuter
Vatthu : Thing
Vatthutto/Vatthủol
Vatthuu/Vatthühinto/
Vatthúsunto
170
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #194

Ablative Case
Plural Numbers
Narindatto/Narindão/
So
Darai/etc.
Narindau/Narindahi/ Narindahinto/Narindasuntol Narindehi/ Narindehinto Narindesunto
He is afraid of Kings.
Tumaṁ
Såmitto/Samio/ Samiu/Såmihintol Samisunto
Darahi/etc. = You should be
afraid of masters.
Aham
Såhutto/Sähuo/ Såhúu/Sähühinto/ Såhůsunto
Padhami/etc. = I learn through
saints.
Note - In this way, other sentences may be constructed.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
171

Page #195

å-ending Feminine
Nouns
Ablative Case Plural Number
Nouns
i-ending Feminine
i-ending Feminine
u-ending Feminine
u-ending Feminine
172
Lesson 7 4
Noun - Pronoun
Måyå Mother
1=1
Juvai - Young lady
=
Putti Daughter

Dheņu : Cow
=
Jambu Tree of
Jāmuna
Pronouns
Ablative Case Plural Number
Mamähinto/Mamȧsunto/Amhȧo/
Amhehi/Mamehinto
Tujjhão/Tubbhehinto
Tähinto/Tasunto/Tehinto
Tio/Tihinto/Tisunto
Ablative Case
Plural
Māyatto/Mãyão/
Māyāu/Māyāhinto/ Māyāsunto

Juvaitto/Juvaio/ Juvaiu/Juvaihinto/
Juvaisunto
Puttitto/Puttio/
Puttiu/Puttihinto/ Puttisunto
Dheṇutto/Dheṇuo/ Dhenuu/Dheṇühinto
Dheņūsunto
Jambutto/Jambuo
Jambuu/Jambūhinto/
Jambusunto
Tubbhasunto/Tumhāhinto/Tumhasunto/= From all of you.
=
From all of us.
= From them.(Mas., Neu.)
= From them. (Fem.)
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #196

Note: Here those declensional forms are given which are much used. For other declencsional forms see the table.
Ablative Case
Plural
Māyatto/Mãyão/
Vayam Māyāu/Māyāhinto/ Māyāsunto
Té
Juvaitto/Juvaio/ Juvaju/Juvaihinto/
Juvaisunto
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
Daramo/etc.
=1

All of us are
afraid of mothers.
Lukkanti/etc. = All of them hide from young ladies.
173

Page #197

Lesson 75 Noun - Pronoun
Nouns Locative Case Singular Number
a-ending Masculine a-ending Neuter i-ending Masculine i-ending Masculine
Nouns
Locative Case
Singular Narinda - King Narinde/Narindammi Rajja - State
Rajje/Rajjammi Sámi - Master
Samimmi Gamaņi - Village Gāmaņimmi
headman Sahu = Saint
Sähummi Sayambhů = Self-made Sayambhummi
u-ending Masculine ü-ending Masculine
person
Värimmi
i-ending Neuter u-ending Neuter å-ending Feminine
Väri: Water Vatthu - Thing Maya - Mother
Vatthummi
i-ending Feminine
Juvai - Young lady
Māyāa/Māyāi/ Mayae Juvaia/Juvaia/ Juvaii/Juvaie Puttia/Puttia/
i-ending Feminine
Putti = Daughter
Puttii/Puttie
u-ending Feminine
Dhenu - Cow
Dhenủa/Dhenual Dheņui/Dheņue Jambúa/Jambúa/ Jambùi/Jambue
ū-ending Feminine
Jambu : Tree of
Jamuna
174
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #198

Pronouns Locative Case Singular Number
Amhammi/Me/Mahammi = In mel on me Tumae/Tuhammi/Tumammi - In you/On you Tammi/Tassim/Tahim
- In them/ On them (Mas., Neu.) Tia/Tải/Tae
- In them/On them (Fem.)
Exercises (1) He dances in the house. (2) Clouds thunder in the sky. (3) He faints in the examination. (4) Water dries up in the Narmada. (5) Sitá hears the story in the house. (6) He sits on the small bundle. (7) Speech tires in old age. (8) The wealth increases in the Kingdom of Rāma. (9) His mother brings up the son in the house, (10) Having laughed, you dance in the house.
Prákyta Grammar and Composition
175

Page #199

Lesson 76
Noun - Pronoun Nouns Locative Case Plural Number
Nouns
Locative Case Plural
a-ending Masculine Narinda : King
Narindesu/
Narindesum a-ending Neuter Rajja - State
Rajjesu/Rajjesuí i-ending Masculine Sámi - Master Sámisu/Sámisum i-ending Masculine Gåmaņi - Village Gamaņisu/
headman Gåmanisum u-ending Masculine Sahu - Saint
Sāhūsu/Sāhúsum ü-ending Masculine Sayambhu - Self-made Sayambhúsu/
person Sayambhusuń i-ending Neuter Vári : Water
Vārisu/Vārisur u-ending Neuter Vatthu - Thing Vatthūsu/Vatthūsum à-ending Feminine Máyā - Mother Māyāsu/Māyāsuṁ i-ending Feminine Juvai - Young lady Juvaisu/Juvaisuí i-ending Feminine Putti = Daughter Puttisu/Puttisus u-ending Feminine Dheņu = Cow
Dhenusu/Dhenüsum ů-ending Feminine Jambu : Tree of Jambūsu/
Jamuna
Jambūsum Pronouns Locative Case Plural Number
Amhesu/Mamesu/Majjhesu Tusu/Tumesu/Tumhesu Tesu/Tesum Tisu/Tisum/Tásu/Tasuń
: In us. = In you. - In them. (Masculine, Neuter) - In them. (Feminine)
176
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #200

Lesson 77
Noun
Nouns in Vocative Case Singular and Plural Number
Plural
Deva
Hari, Harao, Harau, Hariño
Nouns
Vocative
Singular Deva Devo, Devā, Deva = god Hari
Hari, Hari - Name of a god Gåmaņi Gåmaņi • Village
headman Sahu
Sāhū, Sāhu = Saint
Gamaņi, Gāmaņao, Gámaņau Gåmaņiņo
Sāhū, Sähao, Sáhau, Sáhavo, Sähuņo
Sayambhu
Sayambhu = Self-made person
Sayambhū, Sayambhao, Sayambhau, Sayambhavo, Sayambhuno
Kahe, Kaha
Kaháu, Kahão, Kahå
Kaha - Story
Mai
Mai, Mai
Mai, Maju, Maio
= Intellect
Lacchi
Lacchi • Wealth
Lacchi, Lacchia, Lacchio, Lacchiu
Dhenü, Dhenu
Dhenü, Dheņuu, Dheņuo
Dheņu - Cow Bahú - Daughter-inlaw
Bahu
Bahủ, Bahūu, Bahữo
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
177

Page #201

Kamala
= Lotus flower
Väri
Water
Mahu
=
Honey
Exercise
1.
178
Kamala
Vāri

Mahu
Kamalaim, Kamalāim, Kamalāņi
Väriim, Väriim, Vāriņi
Mahūim, Mahūim, Mahūņi
(1) Oh master! you should protect us.
(2) Oh king! there is no pleasure in your kingdom.
(3) Oh friend! you should come to my house. (4) Oh mother! you should bring up children. (5) Oh Sită! lot of suffering is in the forest. (6) Oh son! you should speak the truth. (7) Oh young woman! you should laugh. (8) Boys! all of you should read books.
(9) Friends! all of you should be afraid of the state. (10) Saints! you should observe self-control.
In the Vocative Case calling someone occurs. its signs are : Oh !, O!, Alas! etc. It is known as Interjection.
Prákrta Grammar and Composition

Page #202

(A) Causative Suffixes of Simple Verbs
Verbs
Hasa To laugh
=
Biha To Fear
=
Lesson 78
Causative Suffixes

a
Hasa+a = Hāsa
(Hasānā)
(To casue to laugh) ('a' which is adjacent
to the final syllable is changed into 'a'.)
åva
Hasa+ava = Hasava
(To casue to laugh)
a
Suffixes
Biha+a = Beha (Darānā)
(To cause to fear) ('i' which is adjacent to the final syllable is changed into 'e'.)
äva
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
Biha+āva = Behāva
(To cause to fear) ('i' which is adjacent to the final syllable is changed into 'e'.)

a, e, ȧva, äve
e
Hasa+e = Häse
(To cause to laugh)
('a' which is adjacent to the final syllable is changed into 'a'.)
åve
Hasa+ave Hasāve (To cause to laugh)
e
=
Biha+e= Behe
(To cause to fear) ('i' which is adjacent to the final syllable is changed into 'e'.)
åve Biha+åve = Behåve (To cause to fear) ('i' which is adjacent to the final syllable is changed into 'e'.)
179

Page #203

Duha - To milk
Duha+e - Dohe
Duha+a - Doha (Duhana) (To cause to milk) ('u' which is adjacent to the final syllable is changed into 'o'.) ava
(To cause to milk) ('u' which is adjacent to the final syllable is changed into 'o'.)
ave Duha+āve - Dohave (To cause to milk) ('u' which is adjacent to the final syllable is changed into 'o'.).
Duha+āva - Dohāva
(To cause to milk) ('u' which is adjacent to the final syllable is changed into 'o'.)
Rusa = To sulk
Rüsa+a - Rusa
Rusate - Ruse
(Rusănă)
(To cause to sulk) (There is no change in the long vowel 'ū’ which is adjacent to the final syllable.) åva
åve
Rūsa+ava : Rūsåva
Rüsa+āve = Rüsāve
(Rusåna) (To cause to sulk) (There is no change in the long vowel 'ù'. which is adjacent to the final syllable.)
180
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #204

Jiva To live
Tha = To stay
Nacca To dance
a

Jiva+a = Jiva
(Jivānā)
(To cause to live)
(There is no change in
the long vowel 'i' which
is adjacent to the final
syllable.)
åva
Jiva+ǎva = Jivȧva
a
Tha+a = Thaa
(Thaharānā)
(To cause to stay)
åva
Tha+ava Thava
a
=
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
Nacca+āva =
Naccava
Jivate = Jive

åve
Jiva+ȧve = Jivåve
Tha+e = Thãe
Nacca+a = Nacca Nacca
(To cause to dance)
('a' which is adjacent to
the final syllable is
changed into 'a' but if
conjunct consonent follows
'a' remains 'a'.)
áva
äve
Tha+ave Thave
e
Nacca+e=
Nacce
åve
Nacca+ǎve =
Naccave
181

Page #205

Note - (i) After adding causative suffixes to the Verbs, the Tense suf
fixes are added to construct Causative Forms in different Tenses, as, Hásai = To cause to laugh, Hasávai - To cause to laugh. [Present Tense Third Person Singular.) (ii) If there is a long Vowel adjacent to the final syllable ‘avi' suffix is added besides the above suffixes, as, Rūsa + avi = Rūsavi (Margopadeśika P. 320) (iii) In Arsa Prākṣta causative suffix ave is also used. On adding ave suffix a which is adjacent to the final syllable is changed into 'a' as Kara + ave - Kärave.
(B) Causative Suffixes for the
Passive Voice and the Impersonal Form Verbs
Suffixes avi, o avi
0 (zero) Hasa - To laugh Hasa+ävi : Hasåvi Hasa+0 = Häsa
['a' which is adjacent to the final syllable is
changed into a.) Kara - To do Kara+avi - Karāvi Kara+0 = Kāra
['a' which is adjacent to the final syllable is
changed into a'.] Duha - To milk Duha+åvi - Duhävi Duha+o: Duha Rusa = To sulk
Rusa+ăvi = Rüsávi Rūsa+0 = Rūsa Tha = To stay
Thătāvi: Thaavi Thă+0: Thá Note - After adding the Causative Suffixes to the Verbs, the suffixes of
the Passive Voice and the Impersonal Form are added to the Causatives. Karavi+ijja/ia - Karávijja/Karávia - To cause to do. Rüsăvi+ijja/ia = Rūsávijja/Rūsávia - To cause to sulk.
182
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #206

Kåra+ijja/ia : Kårijja/Kāria - To cause to do. Rüsa+ijja/ia - Rusijja/Rusia = To cause to sulk. Thă+ijja/ia - Thäijja/Thāia - To cause to stay.
Afterwards, the suffixes of different Tenses are added. as, Karāvijjai, Karáviai, Karāvijjahi, Karăviahi, Karávijjami, Karáviami etc.
åvi, o
(C) Causative Suffixes of Participles Verbs
Suffixes
avi
Hasa+avi : Hasavi
Hasa = To laugh Kara - To do
Hasa+0 - Häsa Kara+O Kara
Kara+avi = Karāvi
Causative Past Participle Hasăvita = Hasāvia
Hasávi+ta
- Hasåvita
Hasăvi+da
- Hasăvida
= caused to laugh - caused to laugh - caused to laugh = caused to laugh = caused to laugh = caused to laugh
Hasa+ a
= Hasia
Hása+ ta
= Hasita
Hasa+ da
= Hasida
Causative Present Participle Karávit a + nta
- Karavanto/Karāvento - causing to do Karāvi+ a + māņa = Karāvamāņo/Karávemāņo = causing to do Kara+nta
- Kāranto, Kārento - causing to do Kāra+ māņa
- Karamano/Kāremāņo = causing to do
Causative Obligatory and Potential Participle Karavi + avva
: Karāviavva = should be caused to do Karavi + tavva
- Karăvitavva = should be caused to do Karavi + davva = Karávidavva. - should be caused to do
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

183

Page #207

Karāvi + anijja
Karāvi + aṇīya
Hasāvi tūņa/tūņaṁ
Causative Absolutive Participle
Hasavitum + um
Hasǎvi+uāṇa/tuāṇa
Hasāvi + a
Hasāvi + ttā
Hasāvi + ttāṇa
Hasävi +ūņa/ūnaṁ
Kāra + tum + um
Kara+ tūņa/tūṇaṁ Kāra+uāṇa/uāṇaṁ
Kāra+tuāṇa/tuāṇam
Kāra+ a
Kāra+ttä
Kāra+ttāṇa
Kāra+ūņa/üṇaṁ
Karavanijja = should be caused to do = should be caused to do
= Karavaniya
=
184

- Hasavitum/Hasävetum = Having caused to
Hasavium/Hasǎveum
laugh
= Hasǎvitūṇa/Hasāvitūṇam
Hasaviuāna/Hasăvituāṇa
=
13 Hasavia/Hasǎvea
= Hasävittä
=
= Hasäviūņa/Hasāviūṇam
= Kâritum/Kåretum/Kärium/Kāreum
=
Hasȧvittäṇa
=
= Kāriuāṇa/Kāreuāṇa/Kāriuāṇam/
=
Kärituṇa/Käretūṇa/Kāritūṇam/Kāretūṇam
Kāreuānam
Kāretuāṇaṁ
= Kāria/Kārea
= Kärituȧna/Kåretuāna/Kärituȧnam/
Kärittä
Kärittäṇa
=
Causative Infinitive Participle
Hasǎvi+tum
Hasȧvi+um
Hasavi+dum
Hasävi+ttae
Having caused to do
- Kāriūņa/Kāreūņa/Kariūṇam/Kāreūņam
= Hasǎvitum
= Hasǎvium
= Hasǎvidum
Hasävittae
=

For causing to laugh
""
23
""
""
Prākṛta Grammar and Composition

Page #208

Kara + tum
- For causing to do
= Kāritur/Kāretum = Karium/Kāreum
Kara+um Kāra+dur
= Karidum/Kåredus
Kára+ttae
: Kårittae
Use in Sentences : (A) Intransitive Verb:
Hasa - To laugh
Present Tense
(A-1) Ordinary Active Voice
Aham/Ham/Ammi Hasami/Hasāmi/Hasemi I laugh.
Causative Active Voice Suffixes : a, e, ava, áve Aham/Ham/Ammi Tam (i) Hãsami/Hāsāmi/Håsemi (ii) Hasemi (iii) Hasāvami/Hasávámi/
Hasávemi (iv) Hasāvemi I make him laugh.
Note: By using different Nouns and Personal Pronouns sentences in
different Tenses should be constructed.
(A-2) Ordinary Impersonal
form Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae Hasijjai/etc. (This does not exist in english)
Impersonal form to Causative Passive Voice Suffixes : avi, 0 (Zero) Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae So (i) Hasåvijjai/Hasáviai/etc. (ii) Hásijjai/Hásiai/etc. He is made to laugh by me.
Note: By using different Nouns and Personal Pronouns sentences in
different Tenses should be constructed.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
185

Page #209

(B)
Transitive Verb:
(B-1) Ordinary Active Voice
Aham/Ham/Ammi
Kajjam (2/1) Karami/
Karami/Karemi
I do the work.
186
Kara = To do
Present Tense
(B-2) Ordinary Passive Voice Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
Kajjam (1/1) Karijjai/etc. The work is done by me.
Note: By using different Nouns and Personal Pronouns sentences in different Tenses should be constructed.

Causative Active Voice Suffixes: a, e, áva, äve
Aham/Ham/Ammi
Tena (3/1) Kajjam (2/1) (i) Kārami/Kārāmi/Kāremi (ii) Kāremi
(iii) Karāvami/Karāvāmi/
Karǎvemi
(iv) Karāvemi
I make him do the work
Note: By using different Nouns and Personal Pronouns sentences in different Tenses should be constructed.
Causative Passive Voice Suffixes: avi, 0 (Zero) Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
Kajjam (1/1) Tena (3/1) (i) Karȧvijjai/etc.
(ii) Kārijjai/etc.
I get the work done by him.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #210

(C) Intransitive Verb:
(C-1) Past Participle Active Voice
Aham/Ham/Ammi
Hasio/Hasito/Hasido
I laughed.
(C-2) Past Participle Impersonal form Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae Hasiam/Hasitam/Hasidam
(This does not exist in english)
Hasa = To laugh
(C-3) Obligatory and Potential Participle Impersonal form
Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
Hasiavvam/Hasitavvaṁ/
Hasiniyam/etc.
(This does not exist in english)
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Causative Past Participle
Suffixes: āvi, 0 (Zero) Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
So
(i) Hasavio/Hasăvito/
Hasǎvido
(ii) Hasio/Hasito/Hāsido
He was made to laugh by
me.
Causative Past Participle Suffixes: avi, 0 (Zero) Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
So
(i) Hasavio/Hasavito/
Hasȧvido
(ii) Hasio/Häsito/Häsido He was made to laugh by
me.
Causative Obligatory and Potential form Suffixes: avi, 0 (Zero) Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
So
(i) Hasǎviavvo/Hasåvidavvo/
Hasāviņiyo/etc.
(ii) Hasiavvo/Hasidavvo/
Häsiniyo
He should be made to
laugh by me.

187

Page #211

(C-4)
(C-5)
Ordinary Present
Participle
Aham/Ham/Ammi
Hasanto/Hasamano/etc.
188
Uṭṭhami/etc.
Laughing, I get up.
Ordinary Absolutive
Aham/Ham/Ammi
Hasiūna/Hasidūņa/etc.
Jivami/etc.
Having laughed, I live.
(C-6) Ordinary Infinitive
Aham/Ham/Ammi
Hasium/Hasidum/etc.
Jivami/etc.
I live to laugh.
(D)
Transitive Verb:
(D-1) Ordinary Past Participle
Passive Voice
Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
Kajjam (1/1) Kariam/
Kara
Karidam/etc.
The work was done by me.

Causative Present
Participle
Suffixes: avi, 0 (Zero)
Aham/Ham/Ammi
(i) Hasavanto/Hsāvamāņo
(ii) Hasanto/Hāsamāņo
Tam
Utthami/etc.
Causing him to laugh, I get
up.
Causative Absolutive
Suffixes: avi, 0 (Zero)
Aham/Ham/Ammi
(i) Hasȧviūna/Hasavidūņa/etc. (ii) Hāsiūṇa/Häsidūņa/etc. Jivami/etc.
Having caused him to laugh, I live.
Tam
Causative Infinitive
Suffixes: avi, 0 (Zero) Aham/Ham/Ammi
= To do
(i) Hasavium/Hasăvidum/etc. (ii) Hasium/Hasidum/etc. Jivami/etc.
I live to make him laugh.
Tam

Causative Past Participle
Passive Voice
Suffixes: avi, 0 (Zero)
Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
Teņa (3/1) Kajjaṁ (1/1) (i) Karāviam/Karȧvidam/etc. (ii) Kāriam/Karidam/etc. I got the work done by him.
Prákrta Grammar and Composition

Page #212

(D-2) Obligatory and Potential
Participle Passive Voice Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae/ Kajjam (1/1) Kariavvam/ etc.
The work should be done by me.
(D-3) Ordinary Present Participle Aham/Ham/Ammi
Kajjam (1/1) Karanto/
Karamano
Harisami/Harisämi/etc.
Doing the work, I rejoice.
(D-4) Ordinary Absolutive
Aham/Ham/Ammi
Kajjam (1/1) Kariūna/etc. Harisami/Harisămi/etc. Having done the work, I rejoice.
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Causative Obligatory and Potential Participle
Passive Voice
Suffixes: avi, 0 (Zero)
Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae
Kajjam (1/1) Teņa (3/1)
(i) Karāviavvam/etc.
(i) Kāriavvam/etc.
I should get the work done by him.
Causative Present Participle
Suffixes: àvi, 0 (Zero)
Aham/Ham/Ammi
Kajjam (1/1)/
(i) Karavanto/Karāvamāņo (ii) Karanto/Kāramāno/etc. Harisami/Harisămi/etc. Causing him to do the work, I rejoice.
Tena
Causative Absolutive Suffixes: avi, 0 (Zero) Aham/Ham/Ammi
Kajjam (1/1)
(i) Karāviūna/etc. (ii) Kāriūna/etc.

Tena
Harisami/Harisȧmi/etc.
Having got the work done, I rejoice.
189

Page #213

(D-5) Ordinary Infinitive
190
Aham/Ham/Ammi
Kajjam (1/1) Karium/etc. Jivami/etc.
I live to do the work.

Causative Infinitive
Suffixes: avi, 0 (Zero) Aham/Ham/Ammi Kajjam (1/1)
(i) Karävium/etc.
(ii) Kärium/etc.
Tena
Jivami/etc.
I live to get the work done.
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #214

Lesson 79
Retainer of Innate Meaning Suffixes (Svarthika Suffixes)
No Change in the Innate Meaning of Nouns occurs despite the addition of Svarthika suffixes, after the addition of the Svarthika suffixes declension takes place.
Svarthika Suffixes:- a, illa, ulla
as
Hiaya+a
Canda+a
Pallava+illa Pia+ulla
= Hiayaa
= Candaa

= Pallavilla
=
: Piulla
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

191

Page #215

Lesson 80 Different Pronouns
Exercises
Ja (Ma. N.) - Which or who Ja (Fem.) = Who Ka (Ma. N.) : Who Ka (Fem.) = Who
Eta (Ma. N.) - This Eta (Fem.) = This Ima (Ma. N.) - This Ima (Fem.): This
Translate the following sentences into Prāksta by looking to the table of Declension of the above-mentioned Pronouns.
(A). - (1) The man who tires sleeps. (2) He who angers hides. (3) He who sleeps laughs. (4) Whose body tires, his old age increases. (5) Whom I call, you are that. (6) The wood on which you sit, is mine. (7) By whom you are afraid of, I am afraid of him.
(B). (1) This man laughs. (2) These men laugh. (3) He reads this book. (4) They read these books. (5) This man laughs. (6) Books are read by these men. (7) I live for this. (8) She lives for this. (9) l observe this vow. (10) Knowledge occurs in this man.
(C). (1) What do you do? (2) Which works do you perform? (3) By what does he drink water ? (4) Whose son is he? (5) Whom he is afraid of ? (6) For whom do you live? (7) In whom does your devotion occur ?
192
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #216

(D)
(1) Who dances ? (2) Which vow does he observe ? (3) By whom water was drunk ? (4) For whom do you get up ? (5) Whose son is he? (6) Whose book is this ? (7) Which state do you protect? (8) in which house does he live?
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
193

Page #217

Lesson 81 Indeclinables
Jai
= If
Java - As long as Täva = For that time Jattha - Where Tahim/Tattha - There Jaheva = The way in which Taheva = Likewise Kattha/Kahim - Where Ettha - Here Ma = No
Jahả - The way in which Taha : Likewise Taha = Likewise Evameva = In this way Tam - Therefore Viņa = Without Pi • Also Tá : Then
Exercise (1) As long as you wake up, for that time, I see picture. (2) Where your village is, there is my house. (3) The way in which he desires pleasure, likewise I desire pleasure. (4) Where do you live ? (5) I live here. (6) You should not laugh. (7) Ráma does not get up. (8) If you say, then I do this work.
Such words in the form of which no change occurs and they always remain the same, are called Indeclinables. In other words, in all cases, in all Numbers, and in all Genders when the words remain without any change they are called Indeclinables.
(Abhinava Prākrta Grammar, P 213)
194
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #218

Lesson 82 Conjugation and Verbal endings (1) Present Tense endings Singular
Plural First Person mi
mo, mu, ma
Second Person
si, se
ha, itthá, dha
Third Person
i, e, di, de
nti, nte, ire.
Conjugation of 'Hasa' in the Present Tense
(Hasa - To laugh) Singular
Plural First Person Hasami/Hasámil Hasamo/ Hasamu/Hasama Hasemi
(for other inflections, see
lesson - 5) Second Person Hasasi/Hasasel Hasaha/Hasitthă/Hasadha
Hasesi Third Person Hasai/Hasae/ Hasanti/Hasante/Hasire
Hasadi/Hasade Note : For the Present Tense, see lesson 1 to 8. For the conjugation of å-ending Verbs in the Present Tense, see lessons 4 and 8.
(2) Imperative endings
Singular
Plural
First Person
mu
mo
Second Person
ha, dha
hi, su, dhi, zero ijjasu, ijjahi, ijje
Third Person
u, du
ntu
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
195

Page #219

Conjugation of 'Hasa' in the Imperative
(Hasa-To laugh) Singular
Plural First Person
Hasamu/Hasamu/ Hasamo/Hasāmo/
Hasimu/Hasemu Hasemo Second Person Hasahi/Hasasu/
Hasaha/Haseha/ Hasadhi/Hasa/
Hasadha/Hasedha Hasejjasu/Hasejjahi/
Hasejje Third Person Hasau/Haseu/
Hasantu/Hasentu Hasadu/Hasedu
Note: For the Imperative see lesson 9 to 16. For the conjugation of a-ending verbs in the Imperative see lesson 12 and 16.
(3) Future Tense endings Singular
Plural hi, ssa, ssi, ha hi, ssa, ssi, ha
First Person
ssam (complete suffix)
hissā, hitthā (complete suffix)
Second Person
hi, ssa, ssi
hi, ssa, ssi
Third Person
hi, ssa, ssi
hi, ssa, ssi
Conjugation of 'Hasa' in the Future Tense
(Hasa- To laugh) Singular
Plural First Person Hasihimi/Hasissamil Hasihimo/Hasihimu/
Hasihāmi/Hasissimil Hasihima/Hasissamo Hasehimi/Hasessāmil (For others see lesson 23) Hasehami/ Hasissaṁ/Hasessar
196
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #220

Second Person
Hasihisi/Hasihisel Hasissasi/Hasissasel Hasissisi/Hasissise
Hasihiha/Hasihidha/ Hasihittha (For others see lesson 24)
Third Person
Hasihii/Hasihie/ Hasihidi/Hasihide (For others see lesson 21)
Hasihinti/Hasihinte/ Hasihiire (For others see lesson 25)
Note: For the Future Tense, see lesson 19 to 26. For the conjugation
of ă-ending Verbs in the Future Tense, see lessons 22 and 26.
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
197

Page #221

Lesson 83 Conjugation of 'Asa': To be
Present Tense
Plural
Singular Atthi, mhi
First Person
Atthi, mho, mha
Second Person
Atthi, si
Atthi
Third Person
Atthi
Atthi
Past Tense
Plural
Singular Ási
First Person
Asi
Second Person
Third Person
Asi
198
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #222

Lesson 84 (A) Declensional Forms of Nouns
a-ending Noun Masculine (Deva) (god) Singular
Plural Nominative case Devo, Deve
Deva Accusative case Devam
Devā, Deve Instrumental Deveņa, Devenaṁ Devehi, Devehiń,
Devehim Dative Devassa, Devaya
Devana, Devanam Ablative case Devatto, Devão,
Devatto, Devão, Devāu, Devāhi,
Devau, Devāhi, Devähinto, Deva
Devähinto, Devāsunto, Devehi,
Devehinto, Devesunto Genitive case Devassa
Devana, Devanam Locative case Deve, Devammi
Devesu, Devesur Vocative case He Devo, He Deva, He Devă
He Deva
i-ending Noun Masculine (Hari) (Name of a deity) Singular
Plural Nominative case Hari
Harau, Harao, Hariņo
Hari Accusative case Haris
Hari, Harino Insturmental Harina
Harihi, Harihim,
Harihiñ Dative Harino, Harissa
Hariņa, Hariņam Ablative case Hariņo, Haritto, Hario, Haritto, Hario, Hariu, Hariu, Harihinto
Harihinto, Harisunto Genitive case Hariņo, Harissa
Hariņa, Hariņam Locative case Harimmi
Harisu, Harisum Vocative case He Hari, He Hari He Harau, He Harao,
He Hariņo, He Hari
Praksta Grammar and Composition
199

Page #223

i-ending Noun Masculine (Gamaņi) (Headman of village) Singular
Plural Nominative case Gamani
Gamanau, Gamanao
Gåmanino, Gamani Accusative case Gåmanim
Gámani. Gåmaniņo Instrumental Gamaniņā
Gåmaņihi, Gámaņihim
Gamanihis Dative
Gāmaņiņo, Gåmaņissa Gamaniņa, Gamanīnań Ablative case Gāmaņiņo, Gamaņitto, Gamaņitto, Gamanio,
Gamaņio, Gåmaniu, Gamaniu, Gamanihinto Gamanihinto
Gamaņisunto Genitive case Gamaniņo, Gåmanissa Gåmanina, Gamaniņam Locative case Gamaṇimmi
Gåmaņisu, Gámaņisuń Vocative case He Gamaņi
He Gămanau, He Gåmanao, He Gamanino, He Gamani
u-ending Noun Masculine (Sáhu) (Saint) Singular
Plural Nominative case Sähů
Sāhau, Sähao, Sáhavo, Sähuno
Sähù Accusative case Såhum
Sahů, Sähuno Instrumental Sähuņā
Sāhūhi, Sāhūhim, Sāhūhiń Dative
Sāhuņo, Sähussa Sāhūņa, Sähūņam Ablative case Sähuno, Sähutto, Såhutto, Sähủo, Sähùu. Sahũo, Sahữu,
Sāhūhinto, Sähúsunto Sāhūhinto Genitive case Såhuno, Sähussa Sāhủna, Sähùņam Locative case Sähummi
Sähúsu, Sáhúsum Vocative case He Sähů,
He Sähau, He Sähao, He Sahu
He Sāhavo, He Sähuņo, He Sāhů
200
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #224

u-ending Noun Masculine (Sayambhu) (Self-made person) Singular
Plural Nominative case Sayambhů
Sayambhau, Sayambhao, Sayambhavo, Sayambhuņo
Sayambhú Accusative case Sayambhuí
Sayambhů. Sayambhuņo Instrumental Sayambhuņa
Sayambhūhi, Sayambhūhim,
Sayambhühis Dative Sayambhuno,
Sayambhūņa, Sayambhūnań Sayambhussa Ablative case Sayambhuņo,
Sayambhutto, Sayambhuo, Sayambhutto,
Sayambhậu, Sayambhūhinto Sayambhuo,
Sayambhúsunto Sayambhūu,
Sayambhūhinto Genitive case Sayambhuņo.
Sayambhủna, Sayambhūņam Sayambhussa Locative case Sayambhummi
Sayambhūsu, Sayambhúsum Vocative case He Sayambhu
He Sayambhau. He Sayambhao He Sayambhavo,
He Sayambhuņo, He Sayambhú a-ending Neuter? (Kamala) (Lotus) Singular
Plural Nominative case Kamalam
Kamalaiń, Kamalāiñ,
Kamalāņi Accusative case Kamalam
Kamalăiń, Kamalais,
Kamalāni Instrumental Kamaleņa, Kamalenań Kamalehi, Kamalehim,
Kamalehiń Dative
Kamalassa, Kamalaya Kamalana, Kamalānam
Ablative case
Kamalatto, Kamalão, Kamalau, Kamalahi, Kamalähinto, Kamalā
Kamalatto, Kamalao, Kamalau. Kamalāhi, Kamalāhinto, Kamalāsunto, Kamalehi, Kamalehinto, Kamalesunto Kamalāņa, Kamalāņam Kamalesu, Kamalesum He Kamalaim, He Kamalais, He Kamalani
Genitive case Locative case Vocative case
Kamalassa Kamale, Kamalammi He Kamala
Praksta Grammar and Composition
201

Page #225

i-ending Neuter (Väri) (Water)
Singular
Nominative case Värirn Accusative case Vārim Instrumental Varina
Plural Vāriim, Väriiñ, Vāriņi Vāriim, Vāriis, Vāriņi Varihi, Värihim, Vārihiñ
Dative
Varino, Vārissa
Várina, Värinań
Ablative case
Värino, Väritto, Vário, Vāriu, Vārihinto Varino, Vārissa
Genitive case
Väritto, Vário, Váriu, Värihinto, Várisunto Várina, Värinam Värisu, Värisur He Váriim, He Väriis,
Locative case
Värimmi
Vocative case
He Väri
He Varini
u-ending Neuter (Mahu) (Honey) Singular
Plural Nominative case Mahum,
Mahúim, Mahuiñ, Mahuni Accusative case Mahum,
Mahúim, Mahūiñ, Mahuņi Instrumental Mahuna
Mahühi, Mahūhim, Mahūhis Dative
Mahuno, Mahussa Mahūna, Mahunam
Ablative case
Mahuno, Mahutto,
Mahutto, Mahủo, Mahùu,
Mahuo,, Mahuu,
Mahühinto, Mahúsunto
Mahūhinto Genitive case Mahuņo, Mahussa Locative case Mahummi Vocative case He Mahu
Mahūņa, Mahùņam Mahusu, Mahúsum He Mahúir, He Mahūiň, He Mahuni
202
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #226

Nominative case Kaha
Accusative case Kaham
Instrumental
Dative
Ablative case
Genitive case
Locative case
Vocative case
Dative
Ablative case
å-ending Feminine (Kaha) (Story)
Singular
Genitive case
Locative case Vocative case
Kahaa, Kahāi, Kahãe
Kahaa, Kahãi, Kahȧe
Kahaa, Kahai, Kahãe,
Kahatto, Kahão, Kahau,
Kahāhinto
Nominative case Mai
Accusative case Maim
Instrumental

Kahaa, Kahai, Kahãe
Kahaa, Kahai, Kahãe He Kahe, He Kaha
i-ending Feminine (Mai) (Understanding)
Singular
Maia, Maia, Maii, Maie
Maia, Maia, Maii, Maie
Maia, Maia, Maii, Maie, Maitto, Maio, Maiu,
Maihinto
Maia, Maia, Mail, Maie Maia, Maia, Mali, Maie He Mai, He Mai
Pråkṛta Grammar and Composition
Plural
Kahau, Kahão, Kaha
Kahau, Kahão, Kaha
Kahāhi, Kahāhim, Kahähim
Kahāna, Kahānaṁ
Kahatto, Kahão, Kahau,
Kahāhinto, Kahasunto
Kahāna, Kahāṇaṁ
Kahāsu, Kahāsum
He Kahau, He Kahão, He Kahå
Plural
Maiu, Maio, Mai
Maiu, Maio, Mai
Maihi, Maihim, Maihim Maina, Mainam
Maitto, Maio, Maiu, Maihinto Maisunto
Maiņa, Mainam
Maisu, Maisum
He Maiu, He Maio, He Mai

203

Page #227

i-ending Feminine (Lacchi) (Wealth) Singular
Plural Nominative case Lacchi, Lacchia
Lacchiu, Lacchio, Lacchia,
Lacchi, Accusative case Lacchim
Lacchiu, Lacchio, Lacchia,
Lacchi, Instrumental Lacchia, Lacchiä, Lacchii Lacchihi, Lacchihim, Lacchiń
Lacchie Dative
Lacchia, Lacchia, Lacchii Lacchina, Lacchinam
Lacchie Ablative case Lacchia, Lacchia, Lacchii Lacchitto, Lacchio, Lacchiu,
Lacchie, Lacchitto, Lacchihinto, Lacchisuto Lacchio, Lacchiu,
Lacchihinto Genitive case Lacchia, Lacchia, Lacchii Lacchina, Lacchiņam
Lacchie Locative case Lacchia, Lacchia, Lacchii, Lacchisu, Lacchisum
Lacchie Vocative case He Lacchi
He Lacchiu, He Lacchio, He Lacchia, He Lacchi
u-ending Feminine (Dheņu) (Cow) Singular
Plural Nominative case Dheņu
Dheņuu, Dheņuo, Dhenu Accusative case Dhenum
Dhenüu, Dhenuo, Dhenü Instrumental Dheņúa, Dhenua, Dhenúi, Dhenühi, Dhenühim, Dhende
Dhenühim Dative
Dhenua, Dheņūá. Dheņūi, Dhenüņa, Dhenūņam
Dhenue Ablative case Dhenua, Dhenüă, Dhenúi, Dhenutto, Dhenuo, Dhenúu,
Dhenue, Dhenutto, Dhenão, Dhenühinto, Dhenúsunto
Dhenuu, Dhenühinto Genitive case Dheņúa, Dheņūá, Dhendi, Dhenúna, Dhenúņam
Dheņue Locative case Dhenua, Dheņūá, Dhenúi, Dheņusu, Dheņusuń
Dhenue Vocative case Dhenü, Dhenu
Dhenüu, Dhenŭo, Dhenú
204
Práksta Grammar and Composition

Page #228

u-ending Feminine (Bahu) (Daughter-in-law) Singular
Plural Nominative case Bahū
Bahuu, Bahuo, Bahū Accusative case Bahum
Bahuu, Bahuo, Bahū Instrumental Bahúa, Bahūā, Bahui, Bahühi, Bahūhim, Bahühiñ
Bahủe' Dative
Bahúa, Bahủá, Bahui, Bahüņa, Bahúņam
Bahủe Ablative case Bahúa, Bahūá, Bahui, Bahutto, Bahủo, Bahuu,
Bahue, Bahutto, Bahuo, Bahūhinto, Bahúsunto
Bahuu, Bahūhinto Genitive case Bahúa, Bahúă, Bahūi, Bahůņa, Bahūņam
Bahue Locative case Bahúa, Bahua, Bahui, Bahúsu, Bahúsum
Bahue Vocative case He Bahu
He Bahúu, He Bahuo, He Bahu
Appa or Atta Singular
Plural Nominative case Appå
Appă, Appāņo Accusative case Appań
Appă, Appāno Instrumental Appanā, Appania, Appehi, Appehím, Appehiń
Appanaia Dative Appano
Appāna, Appäņam
Ablative case
Appano
Appatto, Appão, Appau, Appåhi, Appähinto, Appåsunto Appehi, Appehinto, Appesunto Appåņa, Appåņam Appesu, Appesum Appa, Appāņo
Genitive case Locative case Vocative case
Appaņo Appammi, Appe Appā, Appa
Note - (i) Same as Deva as Appa.
(ii) Same as Deva as Appåna or Attåņa.
Prákyta Grammar and Composition
205

Page #229

Nominative case Rāyā
Accusative case Raiņaṁ
Instrumental
Dative
Ablative case
Genitive case
Locative case
Vocative case
Dative
Ablative case
Genitive case
Locative case
Singular
206
Rajan-Raja-Rȧa-Raya
Note (i) Same as Raa or Raya as Deva. (ii) Same as Rāyaṇa or Rääṇa as Deva.

Räiņā, Ranna
Raino, Rayano, Ranno
Raino, Ranno
Nominative case Savvo
Accusative case Savvaṁ
Instrumental
Raino, Rāyaṇo, Ranno
Räimmi
Rāyā, Raya
(B) Declensional forms of Pronouns
Masculine-Savva (All)
Plural
Savve
Savve, Savvȧ
Savvehi, Savvehim, Savvehim Savvesim, Savvāṇa, Savvāṇaṁ Savvatto, Savvão, Savvau, Savvähi, Savvähinto,
Singular
Plural
Råyå, Räino
Rāyā, Räino
Räihi, Räihim, Räihim
Räinam, Raiņa
Räitto, Raio, Räiu, Räihinto
Räisunto
Rāiņam, Raiņa
Raisu, Räisum
Rāyā, Rāyāņo, Raino
Savvena, Savveṇam Savvaya, Savvassa
Savvatto, Savvão, Savvău, Savvähi, Savvähinto,
Savvä
Savvassa
Savvahim, Savvammi, Savvassim, Savvattha
Savvāsunto, Savvehi,
Savvehinto, Savvesunto
Savvesim, Savvāṇa, Savvāṇaṁ Savvesu, Savvesum
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #230

Neuter-Savva Singular
Plural Nominative case Savvam,
Savvăim, Savväin, Savváni Accusative case Savvar,
Savvāim, Savväiṁ, Savvāņi Instrumental Savveņa, Savvenam Savvehi, Savvehim, Savvehiń Dative Savvāya, Savvassa Savvessim, Savvana,
Savvanaṁ Ablative case Savvatto, Savvão, Savvău, Savvatto, Savvão, Savvău,
Savvähi, Savvähinto, Savvähi, Savvähinto, Savva
Savvasunto, Savvehi,
Savvehinto, Savvesunto Genitive case Savvassa
Savvessiṁ. Savvāņa, Savvånam
Locative case
Savvahim, Savvassim,
Savvesu, Savvesum
Savvammi, Savvattha
Feminine . Savva
Singular
Plural Nominative case Savvá
Savvão, Savvău, Savvă Accusative case Savvam
Savvão, Savvău, Savvă Instrumental Savvaa, Savvāi, Savvãe Savvähi, Savvāhiń, Savvåhiñ Dative
Savvaa, Savvăi, Savvãe Savvesiṁ, Savvåņa, Savvanań Ablative case Savvåa, Savvāi, Savvãe Savvatto, Savvão, Savvău,
Savvatto, Savvão, Savvău, Savvähinto, Savvasunto
Savvähinto Genitive case Savvăa, Savvải, Savvãe Savvesim, Savväņa, Savvăņam Locative case Savvaa, Savvăi, Savvãe Savvāsu, Savvåsur
Práksta Grammar and Composition
207

Page #231

Dative
Nominative case So, Na
Accusative case Tam, Nam
Instrumental
Ablative case
Genitive case
Locative case
Instrumental
Dative
Ablative case
Masculine - Ta, Na (He)
Plural
Genitive case
Singular
Locative case
Singular
Nominative case Tam, Nam
208

Tina, Tena, Teṇam,
Nina, Nena, Nenam Tăsa, Tassa, Se
Accusative case Tam, Nam
To, Tamha, Tatto, Tão,
Tău, Tâhi, Tahinto, Ta
Tása, Tassa, Se
Tähe, Tālā, Taià, Tahim, Tammi, Tassim, Tatth
Neuter Ta, Na (That)
Plural
Taim, Taim, Tani,
Naim,Naim, Nāni
Taim, Taim, Tāņi, Naim,Naim, Nāni Tehi, Tehim, Tehim
Nehi, Nehim, Nehim Tāsa, Tesim, Sim, Tāṇa, Tāṇaṁ
Tatto, Tão, Tău, Tahi, Tahinto, Tăsunto. Tehi, Tehinto,
Tesunto
Tása, Tesim, Sim, Tāṇa, Tāṇaṁ
Tesu, Tesum
-
Tina, Tena, Teṇam,
Nina, Nena, Nenam Tása, Tassa, Se
To, Tamha, Tatto, Tão, Tau, Tähi, Tähinto, Tá
Tása, Tassa, Se
Te, Ne
Te, Tȧ, Ne, Nā
Tehi, Tehim, Tehim
Nehi, Nehim, Nehim Tāsa, Tesim, Sim, Tāṇa, Tāṇaṁ
Tatto, Tão, Tău, Tahi, Tahinto,
Täsunto, Tehi, Tehinto,
Tesunto
Tähe, Tālā, Taia, Tahim, Tammi, Tassim, Tatth
Täsa, Tesim, Sim, Tāna, Tāṇaṁ
Tesu, Tesum
Prákrta Grammar and Composition

Page #232

Feminine - Tá, TT (She) Singular
Plural Nominative case Sa, Na
Tā, Tău, Tao, Ti, Tia, Tiu, Tio Accusative case Tam, Nam
Tả, Tàu, Táo, Ti, Tĩa, Tiu, Tio Instrumental Taa, Tāi, Tãe, Tia, Tia, Tähi, Tahim, Tāhis, Tia, Tie
Tihi, Tihim, Tihiń Dative
Tia, Tai, Tae, Tasa, Se, Tina, Tana, Sin, Tesin, Tissă, Tise, Tia, Tia, Tása, Tiņa, Tiņam
Tii, Tie Ablative case Tao, Tải, Tie, Tatto, Tảo, Tatto, Tảo, Tàu, Tahinto,
Tău, Tähinto, Tia. Tiá, Tasunto, Titto, Tio, Tiu, Tii, Tie, Titto, Tio, Tiu, Tihinto, Tisunto
Tīhinto Genitive case Tia, Tai, Tae, Tasa, Se, Tana, Tănam, Sim, Tesin,
Tissă, Tise, Tia, Tia, Tasa, Tina, Tinam
Tii, Tie Locative case Tāa, Tài, Tae
Tásu, Tāsuń, Tisu, Tisum Tia, Tia, Tii, Tie
Masculine - Ja (who) Singular
Plural Nominative case Jo
Je Accusative case Jam
Je, Ja Instrumental Jiņā, Jena, Jenań
Jehi, Jehim, Jehim Dative Jāsa, Jassa
Jesim, Jāņa, Janam Ablative case Jamhá, Jatto, Jão, Jau Jatto, Jáo, Jāu, Jāhi, Jähinto, Jāhi, Jähinto, Ja
Jasunto, Jehi, Jehinto, Jesunto Genitive case Jāsa, Jassa
Jesim, Jāņa, Jāņam Locative case Jahe, Jala, Jaiá, Jahim, Jesu, Jesum
Jammi, Jassim, Jattha
209
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #233

Neuter - Ja (which)
Singular Nominative case Jam Accusative case Jam Instrumental Jiņā, Jena, Jenam Dative Jāsa, Jassa Ablative case Jamhā, Jatto, Jão, Jāu,
Jähi, Jähinto, Já
Plural Jaim, Jáis, Jāņi Jāim, Jāiñ, Jāņi Jehi, Jehim, Jehin Jesim, Jāņa, Jāņam Jatto, Jão, Jau, Jāhi, Jähinto, Jásunto, Jehi, Jehinto, Jesunto Jesiṁ, Jāņa, Jāņam Jesu, Jesum
Genitive case
Jása, Jassa
Locative case
Jähe, Jālā, Jaia, Jahim,
Jammi, Jassim, Jattha
Feminine - Já, Ji (which)
Singular
Nominative case Ja
Plural Jão, Jáu, Jā; Jio, Jiä, Jiu, Ji Jão, Jāu, Jā, Jio,
Accusative case Jam
Jia, Jiu, Ji
Instrumental Dative
Ablative case
Jaa, Jai, Jáe, Jia, Jia Jáa, Jāi, Jáe, Jissá, Jise, Jia, Jiā, Jii, Jie : Jāa, Jāi, Jãe, Jatto, Jão, Jāu, Jahinto, Jia, Jia, Jii, Jie, Jitto, Jio, Jiu, Jihinto Jāa, Jái, Jáe, Jissá, Jise, Jia, Jia, Jii, Jie Jāa, Jái, Jāe, Jia, Jia, Jii, Jie
Jahi, Jahim, Jåhin Jesim, Jāņa, Jāņam, Jiņa, Jiņam Jatto, Jão, Jāu, Jāhinto, Jásunto, Jitto, Jio, Jiu, Jihinto, Jisunto Jesim, Jāņa, Jāņam, Jiņa, Jiņam Jäsu, Jásuí Jisu, Jisum
Genitive case
Locative case
210
Práksta Grammar and Composition

Page #234

Masculine - Ka (who)
Singular
Plural Nominative case ko
Ke Accusative case Kam
Ke. Ka Instrumental Kina, Kena, Keņań Kehi, Kehim, Kehis Dative Kása, Kassa
Käsa, Kesim, Kāņa, Kanań Ablative case Kino, Kisa, Kamhā, Katto, Katto, Kao, Kau, Káhi,
Kảo, Käu, Kähi, Kähinto, Kähinto, Kasunto, Kehi, Ká
Kehinto, Kesunto Genitive case Kasa, Kassa
Kasa, Kesim, Kāna, Kanam Locative case Kähe, Kālā, Kaia, Kahim, Kesu, Kesum
Kammi, Kassim, Kattha
Neuter - Ka (who)
Singular
Plural Nominative case Kim
Kāiń, Kāiń, Kāņi Accusative case Kim
Kair, Kāis, Kāni Instrumental Kiņa, Kena, Kenam Kehi, Kehim, Kehiń Dative Kasa, Kassa
Kása, Kesim, Kana, Kanań Ablative case Kino, Kisa, Kamha, Katto, Katto, Käo, Käu, Kähi,
Käo, Käu, Kähi, Kähinto, Kähinto, Kasunto, Kehi, Ка
Kehinto, Kesunto Genitive case Kása, Kassa
Kasa, Kesim, Kāna, Kanań Locative case Kähe, Kālá, Kaia, Kahim, Kesu, Kesum
Kammi, Kassim, Kattha
Praksta Grammar and Composition
211

Page #235

Nominative case Kā, Ki
Accusative case Kam Instrumental
Dative
Ablative case
Genitive case
Locative case
Dative
Ablative case
Genitive case
Singular
Nominative case Eso, Esa, Inam, Inamo
Accusative case Etam, Eam
Instrumental
Locative case
212
Feminine Ka, Ki (who)
Plural
Kão, Kau, Kȧ, Kio, Kiu, Ki Kão, Kau, Ka, Kio, Kiu, Ki
Kähi, Kähim, Kähim
Kihi, Kihim, Kihim Kāṇa, Kānam, Kesim, Kina, Kinam
Singular

Kaa, Kai, Käe, Kia, Kiä, Kii, Kie
Kaa, Käi, Käe, Käsa, Kissä, Kise, Kia, Kia, Kii, Kie
Kāa, Käi, Käe, Katto, Kão, Kau, Kähinto, Kia, Kia, Kii, Kie, Kitto, Kio, Kiu, Kihinto Kǎa, Käi, Käe, Kāsa, Kissä, Kise, Kia, Kia, Kii, Kie
Käa, Kai, Käe, Kähim Kia, Kia, Kii, Kie
Etiņā, Eteṇa, Eteṇam, Eeņā, Eena, Eenam Se, Etassa, Eassa
Masculine - Eta, Ea (This)
Plural
Etto, Ettähe, Etão, Etău, Etähi, Etahinto,
Etä, Eão, Eȧu, Eähi, Eähinto, Eȧ
Se, Etassa, Eassa
Katto, Kão, Kau, Kähinto Kasunto, Kitto, Kio, Kiu, Kihinto, Kisunto
Etassim, Etammi, Ettha, Ayammi, İyammi, Eassim, Eammi
Kāṇa, Kāṇam, Kesim, Kina, Kinam
Kāsu, Kasum
Kisu, Kisum
Ete, Ee
Ete, Etä, Ee, Eà Etehi, Etehim, Etehim Eehi, Eehim, Eehim Sim, Etesim, Etāṇa, Etāņam, Eesim, Eana. Eāṇam Etatto, Etão, Etău, Etahi, Etähinto, Etȧsunto, Etehi, Etehinto, Etesunto, Eatto, Eão, Eău, Eähi, Eähinto, Easunto, Eehi, Eehinto, Eesunto Sim, Etesim, Etāṇa, Etānam, Eesim, Eana. Eāṇam Etesu, Etesum, Eesu, Eesum
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #236

Dative
Singular
Nominative case Etam, Eam, Esa, Inam,
Inamo
Accusative case Etam, Eam
Instrumental
Ablative case
Genitive case
Locative case
Instrumental
Dative
Ablative case
Neuter Eta, Ea (This)
Plural
Eaim, Eaim, Eȧni
Genitive case
Singular
Nominative case Eså, Ei. Eia,
Locative case
Accusative case Eam, Eim
Etiņā, Etena, Eteṇam, Eenå, Eena, Eenam Se, Etassa, Eassa

·
Etto, Ettähe, Etão, Etâu, Etähi, Etähinto,
Etä, Eão, Eău,
Eǎhi, Eähinto, Eȧ
Se, Etassa, Eassa
Etassim, Etammi, Ettha, Ayammi, İyammi,
Eassim, Eammi
Feminine - Ea, Ei (This)
Plural
Eâu, Eão, Eă,
Eià, Eio, Eiu, Ei
Eau, Eão, Eä,
Eiă, Eio, Eiu, Ei Eähi, Eähim, Eahim
Eihi, Eihim, Eihim Sim, Eāna, Eāṇam, Eiņa/Einam
Prákyta Grammar and Composition
Eȧa, Eǎi, Eãe,
Eia, Eia, Eii, Eie
Eǎa, Eãi, Eãe, Eia, Eia, Eii, Eie Eatto, Eattähe, Eaa, Eãi, Eãe, Eão, Eau, Eähinto Eitto, Eio, Eiu, Eihinto Eǎa, Eai, Eãe, Eia, Eia, Eii, Eie Eǎa, Eǎi, Eãe, Eia, Eiǎ, Eii, Eie
Eaim, Eaim, Eani Etehi, Etehim, Etehim Eehi, Eehim, Eehim Sim, Etesim, Etána, Etānam, Eesim, Eaņa. Eāṇaṁ Etatto, Etão, Etău, Etähi, Etähinto, Etasunto, Etehi, Etehinto, Etesunto, Eatto, Eão, Eau, Eähi, Eähinto, Easunto, Eehi, Eehinto, Eesunto Sim, Etesim, Etāṇa, Etāṇam, Eesim, Eǎna. Eāṇaṁ Etesu, Etesum, Eesu, Eesum
Eatto, Eão, Eau, Eähinto Easunto, Eitto, Eio, Eiu, Eihinto, Eisunto Sim, Eāṇa, Eǎṇam, Eina/Eiņam
Easu, Easum, Eisu, Eisum

213

Page #237

Masculine -Ima (This)
Plural
Singular Nominative case Imo, Ayam, Ime
Ime
Accusative case Inam, Imam, na
Instrumental
Imina, Imeņa, Imenam, Ninā, Nena, Nenam Se, Imssa, Assa Imatto, Imão, Imău,
Dative
Ime, Imá, ne, nå Imehi, Imehim, Imehiń Nehi, Nehim, Nehiń Sim, Imesim. Imaņa, Imăņam Imatto, Imão, Imáu, Imahi Imahinto, Imåsunto Sim, Imesis, Imaņa, Imánarn Imesu, Imesum
Ablative case
Imahi, Imahinto, Ima
Genitive case Locative case
Se, Imssa, Assa Assiṁ, Imammi,
Imassim, Iha
Neuter - Ima (This) :
Singular Nominative case Idań, Iņamo, Inam Accusative case Idar, Iņamo, Iņań Instrumental Imiņa, Imeņa, Imenam,
Nina, Nena, Nenam Dative
Se, Imssa, Assa Ablative case Imatto, Imão, Imáu,
Imáhi, Imahinto, Imá Genitive case Se, Imssa, Assa Locative case Assim, Imammi,
Plural Imáim, Imāiñ, Imāni Imáim, Imaiṁ, Imāņi Imehi, Imehim, Imehiń Nehi, Ņehim, Nehiń Sim, Imesim, Imaņa, Imåņam Imatto, Imão, Imáu, Imahi Imahinto, Imăsunto Sim, Imesim, Imåņa, Imánań Imesu, Imesum
Imassim, Iha
214
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #238

Feminine - Imi, Imá (This) Singular
Plural Nominative case Imi, Imia, Imia, Ima Imia, Imiu, Imio, Imi,
Imão, Imáu, Ima Accusative case Imim, Imam
Imia, Imiu, Imio, Imi,
Imão, Imàu, Ima Instrumental Imia, Imia, Imii, Imie, Imihi, Imibim, Imihiń Imaa, Imái, Imáe
Imahi, Imahim, Imahim Dative
Imia, Imia, Imii, Imie, Imiņa, Imiņam, Sim, Imesim Imia, Imải, Ime
Imána, Imānam . Ablative case Imia, Imia, Imii, Imie, Imitto, Imio, Imiu, Imihinto,
Imitto, Imio, Imiu, Imisunto, Imatto, Imão, Imău, Imihinto, Imatto, Imão, Imāhinto, Imăsunto Imău, Imaa, Imăi, Imãe,
Imähinto Genitive case Imia, Imia, Imii, Imie, Imiņa, Iminam, Sim, Imesim Imáa, Imái, Imåe
Imåna, Imanam Locative case Imia, Imia, Imii, Imie, Imisu, Imisur, Imaa, Imãi, Imãe
Imásu, Imăsum
Masculine. Amu (This) Singular
Plural Nominative case Amů, Aha
Amuno, Amavo, Amao,
Amau, Amů Accusative case Amuí
Amú, Amuno Instrumental Amuna
Amühi, Amuhim, Amūhis Dative Amuno, Amussa
Amuna, Amunam Ablative case Amuņo, Amutto, Amuo, Amutto, Amuo, Amūu,
Amúu, Amūhinto Amühinto, Amūsunto Genitive case Amuņo, Amussa . Amūna, Amünań Locative case Ayammi, lammi,
Amūsu, Amūsum Amummi
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
215

Page #239

Neuter · Amu (This)
Plural Amūiṁ, Amùis, Amūņi Amũim, Amūis, Amůņi Amühi, Amühim, Amuhim
Amūna, Amūnam
Singular Nominative case Amuṁ, Aha Accusative case Amuń Instrumental Amuna Dative
Amuno, Amussa Ablative case Amuņo, Amutto, Amủo,
Amúu, Amùhinto Genitive case Amuņo, Amussa Locative case Ayammi, lammi,
Amummi
Amutto, Amūo, Amúu,
Amühinto, Amúsunto Amůņa, Amūņam Amúsu, Amūsum
Feminine - Amu (This)
Plural
Amuo, Amuu, Amu Amuo, Amuu, Amů Amühi, Amůhim, Amuhiń
Amúņa, Amůņam
Singular Nominative case Amů, Aha Accusative case Amuṁ Instrumental Amùa, Amůá, Amui,
Amúe Dative
Amúa, Amùa, Amūi,
Amúe Ablative case Amùa, Amůà, Amúi,
Amúe, Amutto, Amuo,
Amühinto Genitive case Amúa, Amua, Amui,
Amúe Locative case Amùa, Amūā, Amũi,
Amúe
Amutto, Amūo, Amūú, Amūhinto, Amůsunto
Amūna, Amūnań
Amúsu, Amūsur
216
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #240

Dative
Ablative case
Nominative case Anno
Accusative case Annam
Instrumental
Genitive case
Locative case
Dative
Ablative case
Genitive case
Locative case
Masculine. Anya (Other)
Plural
Singular
Nominative case Annaṁ
Accusative case Annaṁ
Singular
Dative
Ablative case
Instrumental Annena, Anneṇaṁ
Annassa, Annassa
Annatto, Annão, Annau, Annähi, Annähinto,
Anna
Genitive case Locative case
Annena, Anneṇaṁ
Annaya, Annassa
Annatto, Annão, Annău,
Annähi, Annähinto,
Annå
Annassa
Annahim, Annammi,
Annassim, Annattha

Neuter Anya (Other)
Plural
Annǎim, Annāim, Annāni Annāim, Annȧim, Annāņi Annehi, Annehim, Annehim Annesim, Annaṇa, Annāṇaṁ Annatto, Annão, Annău,
Annähi, Annähinto, Annásunto, Annehi, Annehinto, Annesunto Annesim, Annāṇa, Annāṇaṁ Annesu, Annesum
•
Annassa
Annahim, Annammi,
Annassim, Annattha,
Annamhi, Annansi
Feminine
Singular
Nominative case Annå
Accusative case Annam
Instrumental Annǎa, Annai, Annãe
Annǎa, Annai, Annǎe
Annȧa, Annai, Annae, Annatto, Annão, Annău, Annähinto
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
Anne
Anne, Annā
Annehi, Annehim, Annehim Annesim, Annaṇa, Annāṇaṁ Annatto, Annão, Annȧu,
Annähi, Annähinto, Annāsunto,
Annehi, Annehinto, Annesunto Annesim, Annāṇa, Annäṇaṁ Annesu, Annesum
Anna (Other)
Plural
Annȧa, Annai, Annǎe Annǎa, Annai,Annåe
Annău, Annão, Annā Annâu, Annão, Annā
Annähi, Annähim, Annähim Annāṇa, Annāṇaṁ
Annatto, Annão, Annau, Annähinto, Annāsunto
Annaṇa, Annāṇaṁ Annāsu, Annāsum

217

Page #241

Amha (I) In all the Genders Singular
Plural
Nominative case Aham, Mmi, Ammi, Amha, Amhe, Amho, Mo,
Amhi, Ham, Ahayam Vayam, Bhe Accusative case Ne, Nam, Mi, Ammi, Amha, Amhe, Amho, Ne
Amha, Mamha, Maí,
Mamaṁ, Mimam, Ahar Instrumental Mi, Me, Mamaṁ, Mai, Amhehi, Amhäbi, Amha,
Mae, Mamae, Mamai Amhe, Ne Dative
Me, Mai, Mama, Maha, Ne, No, Majjha, Amha, and
Majjham.Majjha, Amha, Amham, Amhe, Amho, Genitive case Amham
Amhana, Amhånam, Mamâna, Mamānam, Mahāna, Mahåņam, Majjhåņa,
Majjhanam Ablative case Maitto, Maio, Maiu, Mamatto, Mamão, Mamău,
Maihinto, Mamatto, Mamahi, Mamahinto, Mamão, Mamău, Mamahi, Mamåsunto, Mamehi, Mamahinto, Mama, Mamehinto, Mamesunto, Mahatto, Mahão, Mahåu, Amhatto, Amhảo, Amhau, Mahāhi, Mahāhinto, Amhāhi, Amhāhinto, Maha, Majjhatto, Majjhão, Amhasunto, Amhehi, Majjhâu, Majjhåhi, Amhehinto, Amhesunto
Majjhähinto, Majjha Locative case Mi, Mai, Mae, Mamai, Me Amhesu, Amhesum,
Amhammi, Amhassim, Mamesu, Mamesur, Amhattha, Mamammi, Mahesu, Mahesuń, Mamassim, Mamattha, Majjhesu, Majjhesum, Mahammi, Mahassim, Mamasu, Mamasur, Mahattha, Majjhammi, Mahasu, Mahasum, Majjhassim, Majjhattha Majjhasu. Majjhasum
218
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #242

Tumha (You) In all the Genders Singular
Plural
L.
Nominative case Tumam, Tam, Tum. Bhe, Tubbhe, Tujjha, Tumha, Tuvam, Tuha
Tumhe, Uyhe,
Tujjhe, Umhe Accusative case Tam, Tum, Tuvar, Vo, Tujjha, Tujjhe, Tumhe,
Tumam, Tuha, Tume, Tue Tuyhe, Uyhe, Bhe Instrumental Bhe, Di, De, Te, Tai, Bhe, Tubbhehim, Tumhehim,
Tumam, Tae, Tumai, Tujjhehim, Ujjhehim.
Tumae, Tume, Tumāi Umhehim, Tuyhehim, Uyhehiń Dative Tai, Tuva, Tuma,
Tu, Vo, Bhe, Tubbha, Tumha, and Tu, Te, Tumhaí
Tujjha, Tubbhaṁ Genitive case Tuha, Tuhaṁ, Tume, Tumhań, Tujjham,
Tumo, Tumai, Di, De, I, E, Tubbhāņa, Tumhāņa, Tubbha, Tumha, Tujjha, Tujjhāņa, Tuvāna, Tumaņa, Ubbha, Umha, Ujjha, Tuhāņa, Umhāņa, Umhåņam, Uyha
Tubbhånar, Tumhanam Ablative case Taitto, Taio, Taiu, Tubbhatto, Tubbhảo, Tubbhāu.
Taihinto, Tuvatto, Tuvảo, Tubbhåhi, Tubbhāhinto, Tuvau, Tuvähi,
Tubbhåsunto, Tubbehi, Tuvāhinto, Tuva, Tuhatto, Tubbhehinto -Tubbhesunto, Tuhảo, Tuhâu, Tuhihi, Tujhatto, Tujhảo, Tujjhâu, Tuhāhinto, Tuha, Tujjhähi, Tujjhāhinto, Tuyha, Tubbha
Tujjhåsunto, Tujjhehi,
Tujjhehinto, Tujjhesunto Locative case Tume, Tumae, Tumai, Tusu, Tusuń, Tuvesu, Tai, Tae, Tummi,
Tuvesuń, Tumesu, Tumesuń, Tuvammi, Tuvassim, Tuhesu, Tuhesuń, Tubbhesu, Tuvattha, Tumammi, Tubbhesum, Tumhesu Tumassim, Tumattha, Tumhesuń, Tujjhesu, Tuhammi, Tuhassim, Tujjhesum, Tumasu, Tuhattha, Tubbhammi, Tumasuń, Tumhasu, Tubbhassim Tubbhattha. Tumhasuń, Tujjhāsu, Tujjhammi, Tujjhassiṁ Tujjahásuń, Tumhāsu, Tujjhattha
Tumhásum
Präksta Grammar and Composition
219

Page #243

Masculine - Ega, Ea, Ekka (One)
Singular Nominative case Ego, Eo, Ekko
Plural Ege, Ee, Ekke
Accusative case Egań, Eam, Ekkam
Ege, Egå, Ee, Ea, Ekke, Ekká
Instrumental
Egena, Eeņa, Ekkena Egenam. Eenam, Ekkeņaṁ
Egehi, Eehi, Ekkehi Egehim, Eehiṁ, Ekkehim Egehis, Eehin, Ekkehiń
Dative
Egaya, Esya, Ekkåy, Egassa, Eassa, Ekkassa
Egesiṁ, Eesiṁ, Ekkesim. Egåņa, Eaņa, Ekkāņa Eganaṁ, Eanaṁ, Ekkánaí
Ablative case
Egatto, Eatto, Ekkatto, Egão, Eão, Ekkảo, Egau, Eāu, Ekkau, Egāhi, Exhi, Ekkáhi, Egabinto, Eähinto. Ekkahinto, Egă, Ea, Ekka
Egatto, Eatto, Ekkatto, Egão, Eko, Ekkao, Egäu, Eau, Ekkau, Egahi, Eahi, Ekkāhi Egåhinto, Eähinto, Ekkähinto, Egåsunto, Easunto, Ekkásunto, Egehi, Eehi, Ekkehi, Egehinto, Eehinto, Ekkehinto, Egesunto, Eesunto, Ekkesunto
Genitive case
Egassa, Eassa, Ekkassa
Egesiṁ, Eesiṁ, Ekkesim, Egāņa, Eāņa, Ekkāņa, Egåņam, Eāņam, Ekkäņam
Locative case
Egesu, Eesu, Ekkesu Egesuṁ, Eesum, Ekkesum
Egahim, Eahim, Ekkahim, Egammi, Eammi, Ekkammi, Egassiṁ, Eassim, Ekkassiṁ
220
Praksta Grammar and Composition

Page #244

Neuter - Ega, Ea, Ekka (One) Singular
Plural Nominative case Egam, Ear, Ekkam Egăim, Eāim, Ekkāim
Egáis, Eāiñ, Ekkais Egåņi, Eāņi, Ekkāņi
Accusative case Egarn, Eam. Ekkam
Egāim, Eāim, Ekkáim Egåiñ, Eảin, Ekkais Egāni, Eāņi, Ekkāņi
Instrumental
Egeņa, Eeņa, Ekkeņa Egenam, Eeņań, Ekkenam
Egehi, Eehi, Ekkehi Egehir, Eehim, Ekkehim Egehim, Eehiṁ, Ekkehiń
Dative
Egåya, Eaya, Ekkáy, Egassa, Eassa, Ekkassa
Egesim, Eesim, Ekkesim, Egaña, Eaņa, Ekkaņa Egåņam, Eāņam, Ekkāņam
Ablative case
Egatto, Eatto, Ekkatto, Egão, Eão, Ekkão, Egău, Eāu, Ekkåu, Egåhi, Eahi, Ekkähi, Egahinto, Eahinto, Ekkähinto, Egā, Ea, Ekka
Egatto, Eatto, Ekkatto, Egão, Eão, Ekko, Egāu, Eau, Ekkāu, Egāhi, Eāhi, Ekkahi Egåhinto, Eähinto, Ekkähinto, Egasunto, Easunto, Ekkasunto, Egehi, Eehi, Ekkehi, Egehinto, Eehinto, Ekkehinto, Egesunto, Eesunto, Ekkesunto
Genitive case
Egassa, Eassa, Ekkassa
Egesiṁ, Eesiṁ, Ekkesim, Egaña, Eaņa, Ekkāņa Egånam, Eāņam, Ekkāņam
Locative case
Egesu, Eesu, Ekkesu Egesum, Eesum, Ekkesum
Egahim, Eahim, Ekkahim, Egammi, Eammi, Ekkammi, Egassim, Eassim, Ekkassim
Praksta Grammar and Composition
221

Page #245

Singular
Nominative case Egă, Eȧ, Ekkä
Accusative case Egam, Eam, Ekkam
Dative
Instrumental Egäa, Eäa, Ekkaa,
Egai, Eai, Ekkäi,
Egãe, Eãe, Ekkae
Ablative case
Feminine Ega, Ea, Ekkȧ (One)
Genitive case
Locative case
·
222

Egäa, Eǎa, Ekkaa,
Egãi, Eȧi, Ekkai,
Egãe, Eãe, Ekkȧe
Egäa, Eaa, Ekkȧa, Egái, Eai, Ekkäi,
Egãe, Eãe, Ekkȧe, Egatto, Eatto, Ekkatto, Egão, Eão, Ekkão, Egäu, Eau, Ekkȧu, Egähinto, Eähinto, Ekkähinto
Egǎa, Eaa, Ekkaa, Egãi, Eãi, Ekkäi, Egãe, Eãe, Ekkäe
Egäa, Eaa, Ekkǎa, Egãi, Eǎi, Ekkäi, Egãe, Eãe, Ekkȧe,
Plural
Egȧ, Eȧ, Ekkȧ
Egão, Eão, Ekkão
Egäu, Eau, Ekkau
Egȧ, Eä, Ekkä
Egão, Eão, Ekkão
Egau, Eau, Ekkau
Egâhi, Eähi, Ekkahi Egähim, Eähim, Ekkāhim Egähim, Eähim, Ekkähim
Egesim, Eesim, Ekkesim, Egäṇa, Eana, Ekkāṇa, Egānam, Eaṇam, Ekkāṇam
Egatto, Eatto, Ekkatto, Egão, Eão, Ekkȧo,
Egȧu, Eau, Ekkǎu, Egähinto, Eähinto, Ekkähinto, Egasunto, Easunto, Ekkǎsunto
Egesim, Eesim, Ekkesim, Egāna, Eána, Ekkāṇa, Egānam, Eaṇam, Ekkāṇaṁ
Egāsu, Easu, Ekkāsu, Egâsum, Easum, Ekkasum,
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #246

Lesson 85
Endings of Declensional
forms of Nouns in
Prakstā
according to Hemacandra
Prákyta Grammar and Composition
223

Page #247

224
Nominative Case Singular Number
Masculine
Deva-a
Hari-i
Gámaņi-i
Sähu-u
Sayambhu-ú
ao
O
:
0-1
0
Neuter
Kamala-a
Väri-i
Mahu-u

( . )a-am
(. )i-im
(...)u-ur
Feminine
Kaha-a
Mai-i
Lacchi
Dheņu-u.
Bahů-u
0
0-i
0
:
0-ů
0
Prákrta Grammar and Composition
W.

Page #248

Nominative Case Plural Number

Masculine
Hari-i
Gåmaņi-i
Sayambhu-Ů
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
Deva-a 0-a
Sáhu-u 0-u
0
i
au
au
au
au
.
ao
ao
ao
ao
no
no-ino
avo
avo
no
ņo-uņo
Neuter

Kamala-a in-áis
Väri-i in-iis im -iim
Mahu-u is-uiñ im-uim
im--āim
ņi-aņi
niini
niūni
Feminine
Kaha-
Bahu-u
Mai-i 0-i 0-10
Lacchi-i 0
Dheņu-u 0-ú 0-uo
u-iน
ullu

225

Page #249

226
Accusative Case Singular Number

Masculine
Deva-a
Hari-i
Gāmaņi-i
Sähu-u
Sayambhū-ú
li) i-im
a-am
i-im
u-um
u-um
Neuter
Kamala-a
Väri-i
Mahu-u

(:) i-im
a-am
u-um
Feminine
Kaha-a
Mai-i
Lacchi-i
Dheņu-u
Bahu-u
(:)
(:)
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
1.) i-iń
a-am
itim
uum
ū-um

Page #250

Accusative Case Plural Number

Masculine
Hari-i
Gamaņi-i
Sáhu-u
Sayambhu-u
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
Deva-a 0-a 0-e
0
no
no-ino
ņo
no uno
Neuter
Kamala-a in-áis
Väri-i in-iin
Mahu-u is-uiñ :im-uim
im-aim
im-iim
ni ani
ni-ini
ni-uni

Feminine
Kaha-a
Mai-i
Lacchi-i
Dheņu-u
Bahů-
0-ii
0-ú
o-io
บน
uuu

227

Page #251

228
Instrumental Case Singular Number

Masculine
Hari-i
Gamaņi-i
Såhu-u
Sayambhu-u
Deva-a na*eņa nam-eņam
nā
na-ina
na-una
Neuter
Kamala-a
Väri-i
Mahu-u
na-ena
nă
ná

namenam
Feminine
Kahá
Mai-i
Lacchi-i
Dheņu-u
Bahu-
a-ua
aria å-iä
āūå
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
i-ui e-ue
e-ie

Page #252

Instrumental Case Plural Number

Masculine
Hari-i
Gamaņi-i
Såhu-u
Sayambhu-u
Praksta Grammar and Composition
hi-ihi
hi
hi--ühi
hi
Deva-a hi-ehi hin-ehiṁ him-ehim
his-uhim
him
hiñ-ihin him ihim
hiñ him
him-ühim
him
Neuter
Väri-i
Kamala-a hi--ehi
hi-ihi
Mahu-u hi-ühi hiñ-uhim
his-ehiń
hiñ-ihis

him--ehiń
him-ihim
him
ühim
Feminine
Kahå-a
Bahủ-ū
hi
Mai-i hi-ihi his-ihin
Dheņu-u hi-ühi him-ühin
hi
Lacchi-i hi him hiñ him
his
hiń
him
him-ihim
him-ühim
him

229

Page #253

230
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
Masculine
Neuter
Feminine
Deva-a
ssa
āya
(onlyDative)
Kamala-a
ssa
ǎya
(onlyDative)
Kahå-å
a
i
e
Dative and Genitive Case Singular Number
Hari-i
ssa
no
Väri-i
ssa
no
Mai-i
a-ia
å iå
i-ii
e-ie
Gāmaņi-i
ssa-issa
no→iņo
Lacchi-i
a
å
i
e
Sahu-u
$$
no
Mahu-u
3555
SS
no
Dheņu-u
a-ủa
ā→ūā
i-ūi
e-ůe
Sayambhu-ů
ssa ussa
no→uno
Bahu-ů
a
à
i
e

Page #254

Dative and Genitive Case Plural Number

Masculine
Deva-a
Hari-i
Gamaņi-i
Sāhu-u
Sayambhu-u
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
na ana
na-ina
na
na-una
na
nańáņaṁ
ņaṁ-iņam
ņam
ņam-ūņam
ņam
Neuter
Kamala-a
Väri-i
Mahu-u
na-aņa
ņa-iņa
na-una
nam-tanam
nar-inam

nam+ūņam
Feminine
Kaha-a
Mai-i
Lacchi-i
Dheņu-u
Bahů-u
na
na-iņa
na
na-ūna
na
nam
nam-inań
narn
nam-úņam
ņam

231

Page #255

232

Masculine
Sayambhu-u ņo-uņo tto-utto
tto
Ablative Case Singular Number Hari-i Gamaņi-i Sähu-u no no-ino
no tto
tto-itto 0-10 u- iu
u-uu hinto-ihinto hinto
hinto-ühinto
Deva-a tto oto u-au hi-ahi hinto-ähinto
o
hinto
Neuter
Väri-i ņo
tto

Kamala-a tto oko u-au hinahi hinto-ahinto 0Kaha-a
Mahu-u no tto 0-uo u-uu hinto-ühinto
orio uju hintoihinto
Feminine
Lacchi-1
Bahü-
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
Mai-i a-ia å ia i-ii enie tto o io uriu hintoihinto
Dheņu-u айа aua i-üi e-ue tto 0-do
tto-atto
ttoitto
tto-utto

hinto
ūu
hinto
hinto-uhinto
hinto

Page #256

Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
233
Masculine
Neuter
Feminine
Deva-a
tto
o❤ão
u→ȧu
hi-āhi, ehi
hinto ȧhinto, ehinto
sunto asunto, esunto Kamala-a
tto
o‹o
u-āu
hi ahi, ehi
hinto ähinto, ehinto
sunto-asunto, esunto
Kahȧ-ȧ
tto-atto
O
u
hinto sunto
Ablative Case Plural Number
Hari-i
Gamaņi-i
tto
tto-ittto
o-io
u-ju
hinto→ihinto
sunto isunto
Väri-i
tto
o-io
o-ju
hinto ihinto
sunto isunto
Mai-i
tto
o-io
ni-o
hintoihinto
sunto isunto
u
hinto
sunto
Lacchi-i
tto-ittto
O
u
hinto
sunto
Şahu-u
tto
on-o
u-uu
hinto ühinto
sunto- usunto
Mahu-u
tto
о¬Ùo
u-uu
hinto ühinto
sunto usunto
Dheņu-u
tto
on-o
u-uu
hinto-ūhinto
Sayambhu-ů
tto→utto
O
u
hinto
sunto
Bahu-ū
tto-utto
O
u
hinto
sunto usunto sunto

Page #257

234
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Masculine
Neuter
Feminine
Deva-a
a-e
mmi
mhi
Kamala-a
a e
mmi
mhi
Kahā-ā
a
i
e
Hari-i
mmi
mhi
Väri-i
mmi
mhi
Mai-i
a→ja
ǎ→jā
iii
e-ie
Locative Case Singular Number
Gȧmaņi-i
mmi-immi
mhi→imhi
Lacchi-i
a
å
i
e
Sähu-u
mmi
mhi
Mahu-u
mmi
Dheņu-u
a-ùa
ā→ūā
i→ūi
e-ūe
Sayambhu-ū
mmi-ummi
mhi→umhi
Bahů-ü
a
ǎ
i
a

Page #258

Locative Case Plural Number

Masculine
Deva-a
Hari-i
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
Gámaņi-i su
Sähu-u su-usu
Sayambhů-ů su
suesu
su-isu
sumesum
sumisur
sum
sumusuń
sur
Neuter
Kamala-a
Väri-i
Mahu-u
su-esu
su-isu
su-usu
sum-esuń
sum-isur
sum
usum

Feminine
Kaha-a
Mai-i
Lacchi-i
Bahů-u
su
su-isu
su
Dheņu-u su-usu sur-ūsur
su
sum
sum
isum
sur
sur

235

Page #259

236

Vocative Case Singular Number
Masculine
Deva-a
Hari-i
Gamaņi-i 0-i :
Såhu-u 0 0-u
Sayambhu-ů 0-u
a-o
0-i
atā
Neuter
Kamala-a
Väri-i
Mahu-u
Feminine
Kahá-a
Mai-i

Prāksta Grammar and Composition

Lacchi-i
Dheņu-u
Bahů - u
0
0
0-u
åre
0-1

Page #260

Vocative Case Plural Number

Masculine
Gåmaņi-i
Såhu-u
Sayambhu-ú
Deva-a Hari-i ►u bei
0
-u
Praksta Grammar and Composition
au
au
au
au
ao
ao
ao
ao
no
ņo
no-iņo
avo
avo
no
ņo-uņo
Neuter
Mahu-u

Kamala-a is-aiṁ
Väri-i iñ-iiń im-iim
iຕໍ•ຍ໌i
im-aim
im-uim
ņi-åņi
ni-iņi
ņi-uņi
Feminine
Kaha-á
Mai-i
i Lacchi-i
Dhenu-u
Bahu-u
0-ü
o
io
0 ūo
0-iu
u“นิน

237

Page #261

S.No. Noun
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1 2 3 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Noun-Index
Nouns used in ‘Prākṛta Grammar and Composition'
English to Prȧkṛta
A
Action
Addiction
Age
Air
Aircraft
Army
Ascetic
Attainment
Axe
B
Beak
Beauty
Being
Birth
Blood
Body
Bone
Book
Bow
Bridge
Brother
Appendix 1 (a)
-
238

Präkṛta
word
Kamma
Vasana
Au
Vāu
Vimāṇa
Camú
Jogi
Laddhi
Pharasu
Cañcu
Rūva
Jantu, Pāni
Uppatti, Gal
Jäi
Ratta
Tanu
Atthi
Gantha
Dhanu
Seu
Bhandhu
Gender of
Präkṛta
word
Neuter
Neuter
Neuter
Masculine
Neuter
Feminine
Masculine
Feminine
Masculine
Feminine
Neuter
Masculine
Feminine
Neuter
Feminine
Neuter
Masculine
Masculine
Masculine
Masculine
Page No.

67
67
136
129
67
137
129
136
129
137
67
129
136
67
137
136
58
129
129
129
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #262

S.No. Noun
Page No.
Prakrta word
Gender of Präkta word
Camel
Karaha
Masculine
58
Jäi
Feminine Feminine
Guha
Caste Cave Child Chin
136 74 58, 129
Balaa, Sisu
Masculine
Feminine
137
Citizen
Hanu Nayarajaņa Ghaya, Sappi
Neuter
67 67,136
Clarified
Neuter
Butter
Khalapú
Masculine
137
Cleaner of granary Cloth
58
Pada, Vattha
Masculine Neuter Masculine
67
Cloud
Meha
58
11.
Senåvai
129
Commander Compassion
12.
Karuņā
74
Masculine Feminine Feminine Masculine
13.
Cow
Dhenu
137
14.
Crow
58
Vāyasa Dahi
15.
Curd
Neuter
136
D
1.
Daughter
74
Taņaya, Dhūā, Feminine Suyā, Putti Bahú
Feminine
137
137
Daughter-inlaw Death
58
Kayanta, Масси, Marana
Masculine Masculine Neuter
129 67
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
239

Page #263

S.No. Noun
Page No.
Prakrta word
Gender of Pråksta word
Neuter
67
Riņa Rakkhasa
Masculine
58
w o no a
Debt Demon Desire Detachment
Icchi, Tanh, Veragga Bhatti Avayasa
Feminine Neuter Feminine
67
Devotion
136
Masculine
58
Disgrace, Dishonour
Ditch
Feminine
74
Gadda Kukkura
Dog
58
Masculine Masculine
Drop
Bindu
129
Earth
Pudhavi
Feminine
137
Education
Sikkha
74
Elephant
Kari, Kareņu, Hatthi Ari, Riu, Sattu Sanjha Parikkha
Enemy Evening
Feminine Masculine Masculine Masculine Feminine Feminine Neuter
129 129 129 74
Examination
74
Eye
Acchi
136
Saddha
74
Faith Father
58
Feminine Masculine Masculine Masculine Neuter
Варра, Piu Sasura Bhaya
129
58
Father-in-law Fear
240
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #264

S.No.1 Noun
Page No.
Prakrta word
Gender of Präkta word
67
ܗ ܣ ܇ ܗ̇ ܩܿܙ
Field Fight Fire Flower Food
Neuter Neuter Masculine
Khetta Jujjha Huavaha Puppha Asaņa, Bhoyana
Neuter
67
Neuter Neuter Neuter
67 67 67
10.
Forest
Vana
11.
Form
136
Āgii Mitta
Feminine Masculine
12.
Friend
58
Jua
Neuter
67
Feminine
74
Ganga Kannā
74
Piamahi
137
Gambling Ganges Girl Grandmother Grandson Grass Grief God
inn #woro o
58
Potta Tiņa
Feminine Feminine Masculine Neuter Masculine Masculine Masculine Neuter
6
Duha
58
129
Pahu, Paramesara Sasana
58
Government
67
Hand
58
Kara Haņuvanta
Masculine Masculine
Hanumana
58
in tw
Head
Sira
Neuter
67
Mahu
Neuter
136
Honey House
Ghara
Masculine
58
Práksta Grammar and Composition
241

Page #265

S.No. Noun
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
1.
2 3 4
2.
3.
4.
242
Human being
Hunger
Husband
Husband's
sister
Husband's
younger brother
Hut
I
Intellect
Intelligence
Itch
Itchiness
J
Jāmuna
Jewel
K
King
Kingdom
Knee
Knowledge

Prākṛta word
Nara
Bhukkha
Pai
Naṇandă
Diara
Jhumpaḍā
Mai
Mehā
Khajjū
Kandu
Jambu
Mani,
Rayana
Naravai,
Narinda
Rajja
Jánu
Nāṇa
Gender of
Präkṛta
word
Masculine
Feminine
Masculine
Feminine
Masculine
Feminine
Feminine
Feminine
Feminine
Feminine
Masculine
Feminine
Masculine
Masculine
Masculine
Neuter
Neuter
Neuter
Page No.

58
74
129
74
58
74
136
74
137
137
129
136
58
129
58
67
136
67
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #266

S.No. Noun
1 2 3 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Law
Life
Limit of time
Lion
Lotus flower
1.
M
Master
Material
Maternal uncle
Sāmi
Vatthu
Maula
Meru mountain Meru
Milk
Khira
Mind
Mana
Minister
Manti
Mistress
Sāmiņi
Monarch
Rāya
Sasi
Sila
Moral conduct
Mortifier
Mother
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10. Moon
11.
12.
13.
14.
Mother-in-law Sassu
15. Mother's sister Mäusi
16.
Mountain
Giri
N
Präkṛta word
Narmada
Vihi
Jivana
Ohi, Avahi
Kesari, Siha
Kamala

Tavassi
Janeri, Māyā
Nammayȧ
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
Gender of
Prākṛta
word
Masculine
Neuter
Feminine
Masculine
Neuter
Masculine
Neuter
Masculine
Masculine
Neuter
Neuter
Masculine
Feminine
Masculine
Masculine
Neuter
Masculine
Feminine
Feminine
Feminine
Masculine
Feminine

Page No.
129
67
136
129,58
69
129
136
58
129
67
67
129
137
58
129
67
129
137, 74
137
137
129
74
243

Page #267

S.No. Noun
Page No.
Prakrta word
Gender of Prāksta word
2
I am
Feminine
Night Nurse
Nisa, Ratti Dhatti
74,136 137
Feminine
Masculine
58
Ocean Old age Order
Sayara Jară
22
Feminine
mi am f
74
Anå
Feminine
74
Owner
Sami
Masculine
129
Patta
Neuter
Paper Paternal Grandfather
67 58
Piamaha
Masculine
Patience
Dhii
Feminine
136
Feminine
74
Pit Pleasure Poet
Gadda Suha, Sokkha
67
n m two rooo:
Neuter Masculine
68 :58:8:11
Kai
129
Praise
Pasamşa
Feminine
74
Thui
Feminine
136
Gavva
Masculine
58
Prayer Pride Prosperity Prosperous woman
Riddhi
Feminine
136
Paramesari
Feminine
137
3
Radiance
Teu
Masculine
129
Råma
58
Rahunandaņa, Masculine Rahu
Masculine
129
244
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #268

S.No. Noun
Prakrta word
Page No.
Gender of Prakrta word
74
Reputation Restraint
Feminine Masculine
58
Rice
67
I stiv oro
Paittha Samjama Dhanna, Säli Saria, Nai Chāyaņa Rajju
136
Neuter Neuter Feminine Neuter
River
74.137
Roof
67 137
Rope
Feminine
Saint
129
Masculine Masculine
129
Sari
Feminine
137
Satisfaction
136
Sähu, Jai, Muni, Risi Sādi Tatti Agama Manti Bia Sayambhu
Scripture
58
a mi ti won c o
Feminine Masculine Masculine Neuter Masculine
129
67
137
Secretary Seed Self-made person Serpent Sister
8
Sappa
Masculine
58
Feminine
74
Sasă, Bahiņi
Feminine
137
10.
Siya
Feminine
74
11.
Naha
67
Nidda
Sita Sky Sleep Small bundle Small earthan Water pot
Neuter Feminine Neuter
74
13.
Pottala
67
Kalasiya
Feminine
74
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
245

Page #269

S.No. Noun
Page No.
Prakta word
Gender of Praksta word
15.
137
Feminine Netuer
16.
Kadacchu Chikka Putta, Suņu Gaņa
17.
Masculine
67 58,129 67
18.
Neuter
Jámáu
Masculine
129
19. 20.
Feminine
74
Vāyā Appaladdhi
21.
Feminine
136
Small spoon Sneeze Son Song Son-in-law Speech Spiritual attainment Splendour State Stick Story Strength Suffering Sun
22.
Soha
Feminine
74
23.
67
24.
67. 136
74
25. 26.
Rajja
Neuter Lakkuda, Dāru Neuter Kaha
Feminine
Feminine Dukkha Masculine Divāyara, Masculine Ravi
Masculine
Satti
136
27.
58
28.
58
129
Teacher
Masculine
129
Tear
Neuter
136
Thing
Guru Aṁsu Vatthu Tisa Sutta
Neuter
136
Thirst
Feminine
74
cm twório
Thread
67
Tree
Taru
Neuter Masculine Feminine
129
Tree of Jamuna Jambů Truth
Sacca
137 67
Neuter
246
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #270

S.No. Noun
Page No.
Prakrta word
Gender of Prakrta word
Masculine
58
Village Village
Gama Gamani
Masculine
137
headman Violence
Hiṁsā
74
Feminine Masculine
Vow
Vaya
58
w
Water
Masculine
58
Salila, Udaga,
Neuter
67
IVári
Neuter
136
67
137, 74
58
ni mwo
74
58
74
67
74
Wealth
Dhana, Neuter
Lacchi, Kamala Feminine Well Kūva
Masculine Wife Bhajja
Feminine Wind Mārua
Masucline Wine Mairā,
Feminine Majja
Neuter Wisdom Paņņá
Feminine Woman
Itthi, Nārī, Feminine
Mahila, Jaya Feminine Woman residing Nagari Feminine in a city Woman saint Samaņi Feminine Wood
Katha, Neuter Lakkuda, Neuter Daru
Neuter World Bhava Masculine
137, 74
137
137
11.
67
67
136
12.
58
Prákyta Grammar and Composition
247

Page #271

S.No. Noun
123
248
Y
Prākṛta word
Yamuna
Jaunā
Young woman Juvai
Youth

Jovvana
Gender of
Präkṛta
word
Feminine
Feminine
Neuter
Page No.

74
136
67
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #272

Appendix - 1 (b)
Noun-Index Nouns used in Praksta Grammar and Composition'
Präkşta to English
S.No. Noun
Gender
Page No.
English Translation
A(31)
Amsu
Neuter
136
Acchi
Neuter
136
Atthi
Tear Eye Bone Spiritual attainment
Neuter
136
in Mo w o
Appaladdhi
Feminine
136
Ari
129
Enemy Dishonour, Disgrace
Masculine Masculine
Avayasa
58
Avahi
Limit of time
Feminine
136
o
Asana
Food
Neuter
67
Age
Neuter
136
À (3) Āu Agama Āgii Āņā
Scripture
Masculine
58
o mo
Form
Feminine
136
Order
Feminine
74
I(5)
Icchá
Desire
Feminine
74
rin
Itthi
Woman
Feminine
137
Prákyta Grammar and Composition
249

Page #273

S.No. Noun
Gender
Page No.
English Translation
ww
U(3) Udaga Uppatti
Water
Neuter
67
waji
Birth
Feminine
136
O (311) Ohi
1.
Feminine
136
Limit of Time
Ka()
Kai
Poet
Masculine
129
Neuter
67
Kattha Kadacchu
Wood Small Spoon
Feminine
137
Kandu
Itchiness
Feminine
137
wa Mtwór os
o
Feminine
74
Kannā Kamala Kamala
Girl Lotus Flower
Neuter
69
Wealth
Feminine
Kamma
Action
Neuter
Death
Masculine
58
Kayanta Kara
Masculine
58
11.
Karaha
Masculine
58
12.
Kari
Hand Camel Elephant Compassion Elephant
Masculine
129
13.
Feminine
74
Karunā Kareņu
14.
Masculine
129
15.
Kalasia
Small earthan
Feminine
74
water pot
16.
Kaha
Story
Feminine
74
250
Prákrta Grammar and Composition

Page #274

S.No. Noun
17.
18.
19.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Kukkura
Kūva
Kesari
Kha (ख)
Khajjú
Khalapú
Khira
Khetta
Ga (T)
Gai
Gangå
Gantha
Gadḍā
Gavva
Gāṇa
Gáma
Gāmani
Giri
Guru
Guhä
English
Translation

Dog
Well
Lion
Itch
Cleaner of
granary
Milk
Field
Birth
Ganges
Book
Ditch, Pit
Pride
Song
Village
Village
headman
Mountain
Teacher
Cave
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
Gender
Masculine
Masculine
Masculine
Feminine
Masculine
Neuter
Neuter
Feminine
Feminine
Masculine
Feminine
Masculine
Neuter
Masculine
Masculine
Masculine
Masculine
Feminine

Page No.
58
58
129
137
137
67
67
136
74
58
74
58
67
58
137
129
129
74
251

Page #275

S.No. Noun
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1 2 3 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
252
Gha (a)
Ghaya
Ghara
Ca (*)
Cañcu
Camú
Cha (3)
Chāyaṇa
Chikka
Ja ()
Jai
Jauņā
Jantu
Jambu
Jambū
Janeri
Jarā
Jai
Jāņu
Jāmāu
Jāyā
Jivana

English Translation
Clarified Butter Neuter
House
Beak
Army
Roof
Sneeze
Gender
Son-in-law
Woman
Life
Masculine
Feminine
Feminine
Neuter
Neuter
Saint
Yamuna
Being
Jämuna
(name of fruit)
Tree of Jamuna Feminine
Mother
Feminine
Old age
Feminine
Birth
Feminine
Knee
Neuter
Masculine
Feminine
Neuter
Masculine
Feminine
Masculine
Masculine
Page No.

67
58
137
137
67
67
129
74
129
129
137
137
74
136
136
129
74
67
Präkṛta Grammar and Composition

Page #276

S.No. Noun
Gender
Page No.
English Translation
Jujjha
67
13. 14.
Juvai
Fight
Neuter Young woman/ Feminine lady
136
Jua
Gambling
Neuter
67
16.
Ascetic
Masculine
129
Jogi Jovvana
17.
Youth
Neuter
67
Jha (3) Jhumpadā
1.
Hut
Feminine
| 74
-
Na (0) Nai
River
Feminine
137
Nananda
74
74
67
Husband's Feminine sister Narmada Feminine Citizen
Neuter Human being Masculine
Masculine
Nammaya Nayarajana Nara Naravai
in two roo oo
58
King
129
Naha
Sky
Neuter
67
Nagari
Feminine
137
Woman residing in a city Knowledge Woman
Nána
67
Nāri
Neuter Feminine Feminine
137
Nidda
Sleep
74
12.
Nisă
Night
Feminine
74
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
253

Page #277

S.No. Noun
Gender
Page No.
English Translation
I
Ta (a) Tanayā Tanha
Daughter
Feminine
74
Desire
Feminine
74
Tanu
137
Tatti
Body Satisfaction Tree
136
Feminine Feminine Masculine Masculine
Taru
129
am #wo rio o
Tavassi
Mortifier
129
Tina
Grass
Neuter
67
Tisā
Thirst
Feminine
74
Teu
Radiance
Masculine
129
Tha ()
1.
Thui
Prayer
Feminine
136
Da (C)
Dahi
Neuter
136
Daru
Neuter
136
Diara
Masculine
58
wi w two
Curd Wood, stick Husband's younger brother Sun Suffering Grief
58
Divayara Dukkha
Masculine Masculine Masculine
58
Duha
58
Dha (9)
1.
Dhana
Wealth
Neuter
67
254
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #278

S.No. Noun
Gender
Page No.
English Translation
Dhanu
Bow
Masculine
129
Dhatti
Nurse
Feminine
137
Dhanna
Rice
Neuter
67
on & won
Dhii
Patience
Feminine
136
Dhùa
Feminine
74
Daughter Cow
Dhenu
Feminine
137
Na (ar)
1.
Narinda
King
Masculine
58
Pa (9)
Pai
129
Husband Reputation
Paittha
74
Pada
Cloth
58
Masculine Feminine Masculine Feminine Neuter Masculine
Pannā
Wisdom
74
Patta
67
58
Paramesara Paramesari
Paper God Prosperous woman
Feminine
137
Parikkha
Examination
Feminine
74
9.
Pasamsä
Praise
Feminine
74
10.
Pahu
129
11.
Pani
129
God
Masculine Being
Masculine Paternal Gran- Masculine dfather
12.
Piamaha
58
13.
Piāmahi
Grandmother Feminine
137
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
255

Page #279

S.No. Noun
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
256
Piu
Pudhavi
Putta
Putti
Puppha
Poṭṭala
Potta
Pha (फ)
Pharasu
Ba (a)
Bandhu
Bappa
Bahini
Bahů
Balaa
Bindu
Bia
Bha (4)
Bhajjä
Bhatti
Bhaya
Bhava

English Translation
Father
Earth
Son
Daughter
Flower
Small Bundle
Grandson
Axe
Brother
Father
Sister
Child
Drop
Seed
Gender
Masculine
Masculine
Feminine
Daughter-in-law Feminine
Masculine
Masculine
Neuter
Wife
Devotion
Fear
World
Masculine
Feminine
Masculine
Feminine
Neuter
Neuter
Masculine
Masculine
Feminine
Feminine
Neuter
Masculine
Page No.

129
137
58
137
67
67
58
129
129
58
137
137
58
129
67
74
136
67
58
Präkṛta Grammar and Composition

Page #280

S.No. Noun
Gender
Page No.
English Translation
5.
Bhukkha
Feminine
74
Hunger Food
Bhoyana
Neuter
67
Ma (H)
Mai
Intellect
Feminine
136
Maira
Wine
Feminine
74
Manti
Minister/
Masculine
129
Secretary
Death
Masculine
129
Wine
Neuter
67
Maccu Majja Mana Mani
Mind
Neuter
67
136
Marana
67
Mahila
74
10.
Mahu
136
11.
Maula
Jewel
Feminine Death
Neuter Woman
Feminine Honey
Neuter Maternal uncle Masculine Mother's sister Feminine Mother
Feminine Wind
Masculine Friend
Masculine Saint
Masculine
12
Mausi
58 137 74
13.
Maya
14.
Mārua
58
15.
58
Mitta Muni
16.
129
17.
Meru
Meru mountain Masculine
129
18.
Meha
Cloud
Masculine
58
19.
Meha
Intelligence
Feminine
74
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
257

Page #281

S.No. Noun
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
1.
2.
3.
258
Ra (3)
Rakkhasa
Rajja
Rajju
Ratta
Ratti
Rayana
Ravi
Rahu
Rāya
Riu
Rina
Riddhi
Risi
Rūva
La ()
Lakkuda
Lacchi
Laddhi
English Translation
Night
Jewel
Sun
Rāma
Rahunandana Rāma

Demon
Kingdom,
State
Rope
Blood
Monarch
Enemy
Debt
Prosperity
Saint
Beauty
Stick, wood
Wealth
Attainment
Gender
Masculine
Neuter
Feminine
Neuter
Feminine
Masculine
Masculine
Masculine
Masculine
Masculine
Masculine
Neuter
Feminine
Masculine
Neuter
Neuter
Feminine
Feminine
Page No.

58
67
137
67
136
58
129
129
58
58
129
67
136
129
67
67
137
136
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #282

S.No. Noun
Gender
Page No.
English Translation
Va (a)
Vaņa
67
Vattha
67
Forest Neuter Cloth
Neuter Material, Thing Neuter Vow
Masculine
Vatthu
136
Vaya
58
Vasana
Addiction
67
Vāu
Air
129
Neuter Masculine Masculine Feminine
Vayasa
58
Vaya
74
Väri
Neuter
136
Crow Speech Water Aircraft Law, Rule Detachment
Vimaņa
Neuter
67
Vihi
129
Masculine Neuter
Veragga
67
Restraint
Masculine
58
Sa (AT) Samjama Sanjha Sacca
Evening
Feminine
74
Truth
Neuter
67
Satti
136
Sattu
129
Saddha
Strength Feminine Enemy Masculine Faith
Feminine Serpent Masculine Clarified butter Neuter
74
58
Sappa Sappi
136
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
259

Page #283

S.No. | Noun
Gender
Page No.
English Translation
137
Samani Sayambhú
Woman Saint Self-made
Feminine Masculine
10.
137
person
11.
Saria
River
Feminine
74
12.
Water
Masculine
58
74
14.
129
Salila Sasa Sasi Sasura Sassű Sadi
15.
58
137
Sister
Feminine Moon
Masculine Father-in-law Masculine Mother-in-law Feminine Sari
Feminine Master, owner Masculine Mistress Feminine Ocean
Masculine
17.
137
18.
Sami
129
137
58
Sāmiņi Sayara Sáli Sāsaņa
21
Rise
Neuter
136
22.
Neuter
67
Government Saint
23.
Sahu
Masculine
129
24.
Sikkha
Education
Feminine
74
25.
Sira
Head
Neuter
67
26.
Sisu
Child, Son
Masculine
129
27.
Siya
74
28.
Sila
Sīta
Feminine Moral conduct Neuter Lion
Masculine
29.
Siha
8
30.
Sutta
Thread
Neuter
260
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #284

S.No. Noun
Gender
Page No.
English Translation
Daughter
Feminine
74
Suya Suha
Pleasure
Neuter
67
Sūnu
Son
129
Seu
Masculine Masculine Masculine
129
Senāvai
129
Bridge Commander Pleasure Splendour
Sokkha
Neuter
67
Soha
Feminine
74
Ha (5) Haņu
Chin
137
Feminine Masculine
Haņuvanta
Hanumana
58
Hatthi
Elephant
Masculine
129
Himsă
Violence
Feminine
74
Huavaha
Fire
Masculine
58
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
261

Page #285

S.No. Verb
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
262
Verb-Index
Verbs used in ‘Prākṛta Grammar and Composition' English to Prākṛta
To ache
To agitate
To anger
To appear
To attach
B
To bark
To bathe
To become
To blame
To bloom,
To blossom
To braid
To break
To break into
pieces
To breathe
To bring up
To burn
To buy
Appendix 2 (a)
·

Präkṛta
Verb
Dukkha
Chubbha
Kuppa
Phura, Jamma
Gijjha
Bukka
Nhä
Hava, Hu, Ho
Khimsa,
Garaha
Viasa, Phulla
Gundha
Tuṭṭa.
Toda, Cura
Khanda
Ussasa
Påla
Jala,
Daha, Daha
Kina
Transitive/
Intransitive
Intransitive
59
Intransitive 75
Transitive
138
Intransitive
68
Intransitive
75
Intransitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
68,59, 11
Transitive
138
Transitive
120
Intransitive 68
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
Page No.
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
59
11

138
59
120, 130
138
75
112, 132
59
138
138, 144
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #286

S.No. Verb
Praksta Verb
Transitivel Intransitive
Page No.
C
120, 132 75
144
miami woro o CES
120 138 130
138
49
To call
Kokka, Pukkaral Transitive To calm down Uvasama Intransitive To carry Dhāra
Transitive To cheat Chala
Transitive To chew Cava
Transitive To colour Ranga
Transitive To come Agaccha Transitive To come down Uttara
Intransitive To come out Nisara
Intransitive To congratulate Vaddhava Transitive To conquer Jiņa, Jaya Transitive To cough Khasa
Intransitive To count Gana
Transitive To cover Dhakka
Transitive To create Raya
Transitive To criticise Khimsa
Transitive To cut Katta
Transitive
49
10.
130
11.
138
12.
75 138, 144
13.
14.
1
120
15.
138
16.
138
17.
120
Nacca
i
Intransitive Intransitive
Cirāva
168
Transitive
130, 132
Transitive
in mi twórico
To dance To delay To demand To describe To desire To detach To die To dig
Magga Vaņņa Iccha
Transitive
130 130 75
Uvarama
Intransitive
Mara
Intransitive
49
Khana
Transitive
120
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
263

Page #287

S.No. Verb
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To dirty
Maila
To disappear
Khaya, Nassa
To discover
Gavesa
To do
Kara
To drink
Piba, Pia
To drop, To drip Cua, Nijjhara
To dry,
Sukka
To dry up
To dupe
E
To eat
To emanate
To embarrass
To emerge
To end
To endeavour
To enthuse
To exist
F
To faint
To fall
To fall down
To fear
To fight
Präkṛta Verb
264

Chala
Asa, Khā,
Bhunja
Uppajja
Lajja
Jamma
Khaya
Ujjama,
Cettha
Ucchaha
Ho, Hu, Vijja
Muccha
Pada
Ludha
Dara, Biha
Jujjha, Joha
Transitive/
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Page No.
130
59
120
130
130, 144
68, 59
59
Transitive
130
Transitive
138
Intransitive
59
Intransitive
49
Intransitive 68
Intransitive
59
Intransitive
49
Intransitive
68
Intransitive
68
Intransitive
59,68

120
49
49
59
49, 75
49, 75
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #288

S.No. Verb
6.
7.
8.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To flounder
To fly
To forgive
G
To get
To get up
To give
To give up
To glitter
To go
To
go round
To graze
To greet
To grieve
To grind
To grow
To grow old
H
To halt
To hear
To help
To hide
To hold
To honour
Prākṛta
Verb

Taḍaphaḍa
Udda
Khama
Pāva, Kara
Uttha
Dā
Panama,
Oṇanda
Khijja, Kilisa
Pisa
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Choda
Transitive
Rucca
Intransitive
Gaccha, Ya, Já, Transitive
Vacca
Transitive
Ghuma
Intransitive
Cara
Transitive
Transitive
Uga, Uppajja
Jara
Thambha
Nisuna,
Suna
Uvayara
Lukka
Dhāra, Vaha
Māna
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
Transitive/
Intransitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive

Page No.
49
59
138, 144
138, 158
49
130
120
49
138
138
49
112
132
130
68,75
120
59, 167
59
75, 49
130
112, 132
120
1
130
138
265

Page #289

S.No. Verb
Page No.
Pråksta Verb
Transitivel Intransitive
To illuminate
Transitive
138
Joa Vaddha
Intransitive
68
i am w
To increase To injure To invite
Himsa
Transitive
130
Kokka
Transitive
120
To irrigate
Sinca
Transitive
130
mit
To jump
Kudda, Kulla
Intransitive
68, 49
Rakkha
Transitive
138
Transitive
130
inn i
To keep To kill To kindle To know
Haņa, Māra Daha
Transitive
138
Jana
Transitive
112
Muna,
Transitive
130
Vinna
Transitive
130
Hasa
Intransitive Intransitive
Ucchala
49
Sikkha
Transitive
138
130
i an ti wonos
To laugh To leap To learn To lecture To lick To limp To listen To live
Vakkhana Liha
Transitive Transitive Intransitive
138
Kanja
75
Suņa
Transitive
112
Jiva
Intransitive
266
Präkta Grammar and Composition

Page #290

S.No. Verb
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
M
To make
Raya
To meditate
Jha, Jhaa
To mistake
Cukka
To mortify
Tava
To move about Dula
To move away Khisa
N
To nurture
O
To obey
To observe
To obtain
To oil
To oppress
P
To partake
of food
To peel
To pick
To play
To pray
To produce
Pråkṛta Verb

Pāla
Pāla
Päla
Labha
Coppaḍa
Pida
Jima,
Jema
Cholla
Cina
Khela, Kidda,
Khedda
Thuna
Jana
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
Transitive/
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive

Page No.
138
138, 144
68
68
59
75
132
132
132
138, 144
120
130
120
130
120
120
49,68
75
130
130
267

Page #291

S.No. Verb
7.
1.
1.
R
1.
To read
2.
To rejoice
3.
To remember
4.
To renounce
5.
To reproach
6.
To reside
7.
To rise
8.
To roar
9.
To roll about
10.
To run
11. To run away
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To protect
268
To quarrel
S
To salute
To saw
To say
To search out
To see
To send

Prākṛta
Verb
Rakkha
Kalaha
Transitive/
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Padha
Transitive
Ullasa, Harisa Intransitive
Sumara
Transitive
Cua, Chadda
Transitive
Dhikkära
Transitive
Vasa
Intransitive
Uga
Intransitive
Gajja, Guñja
Intransiitive
Lotta
Intransitive
Dhāva
Transitive
Pala
Intransitive
Pesa
Nama, Panama, Transitive
Vanda
Katta
Kaha, Bhaṇa
Gavesa
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Nirakkha,
Transitive
Dekkha, Peccha Transitive
Page No.

112, 132,
144
49
130
49, 59
130
130, 120
138
68
59
59,68
68
138
59
130, 112
132, 138
120
130
120
138
120, 132,
130, 144
144
Transitive
Präkṛta Grammar and Composition

Page #292

S.No. Verb
Praksta Verb
Transitivel | Page No. Intransitive
Intransitive
roo a
To separate To serve To shine
Transitive
Chutta Seva Soha, Chajja Rucca Tava
168
130 59,75
Jintransitive Intransitive
49
10.
Intransitive
| 68
11.
To shine like flame To shout To sing To sit
12.
120 138, 130 49,75 59
13.
TUTTI
14.
68. 1
138 130
16.
Pukkara Transitive Gaa, Gå Transitive Accha, Uvavisa, Intransitive Cittha
Intransitive Lotta, Saya Intransitive Jingha Transitive Cava, Bolla
Transitive Kila
Intransitive Pasara
Intransitive Uga
Intransitive
Intransitive Kalanka
Transitive Damsa
Transitive Thambha Intransitive
17.
68
18.
59
19.
To sleep To smell To speak To sport To spread To sprout To stay To stigmatise To sting To stop To succeed To sulk
59
20.
Tha
11
21.
TUTTI
120 130 75, 49 68
lintransitive
Sijjha Rüsa
25.
Intransitive
Transitive
To take To taste To tear
Le, Labha Cakkha
Transitive
130, 138 120, 138 120
Phāda
Transitive
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
269

Page #293

S.No. Verb
Page No.
Praksta Verb
Transitivel Intransitive
Transitive
To thieve To think
Corava Cinta
word
o
Transitive Transitive
130 130 130, 144 49
To tie
Bandha
Thakka
Intransitive
To tire To thresh To throw
Kutta
Transitive
120
10.
Transitive
138
11.
To thunder
Khiva Gajja Chuva
Intransitive
59
m
12.
To touch
Transitive
120
13.
To tremble
Intransitive
49
14.
Kampa Nijjhara Ludha
VO
Intransitive Intransitive
15
To trickle To tumble down To turn
16.
Vala
Intransitive
120
mi aj mi
To uncover Ugghảda To understand Jāņa, Bujjha To uproot Uppāda
Transitive Transitive Transitive
112, 138
120
V
To vanish
Gala, Khaya
Intransitive
59.75
1,68
wia
Jagga, Jagara Rama
Intransitive Intransitive
68
w To wake up To wander happily To wash To weave together strips
Transitive
120
Dhoa Gundha
Transitive
138
270
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #294

S.No. Verb
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.
To weep
To Welcome
To whine
To win
To withhold
To worry
To worship
To write
Y
To Yawn
Prȧkṛta Verb

Kanda, Ruva
Onanda
Gaḍayada
Jiņa, Jaya
Rokka
Cinta
Acca
Liha
Jambha
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
Transitive/
Intransitive
Intransitive
59,49
Transitive
130
Intransitive 75
Transitive
138
Transitive
120
Transitive
130
Transitive
120, 132
Transitive
130
Intransitive
Page No.

75
271

Page #295

Appendix - 2 (b)
Verb-Index Verbs used in ‘Prāksta Grammar and Composition'
Pråksta to English
Page No.
S.No. Prákyta
Verb
English Translation
Transitivel Intransitive
A (31)
Acca
Transitive
120
wa mji
Accha
To worship To sit To eat
Intransitive
49
Asa
Transitive
130
Å (371) Agaccha
-
To come
Transitive
138
1 (5)
Iccha
To desire
Transitive
130
U(3) Uga
120
Ugghāda Ucchala
49
Ucchaha
To rise, To grow, Intransitive To sprout To uncover Transitive To leap Intransitive To enthuse Intransitive To endeavour Intransitive To get up Intransitive To fly
Intransitive To come down Intransitive
68
- w noworo
49
Ujjama Uttha Udda Uttara
59
49
272
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #296

S.No. Praksta
Verb
Page No.
English Translation
Transitivel Intransitive
59
Intransitive Transitive
10.
120
Uppajja Uppada Ullasa Uvayara
Intransitive
49
To emanate To uproot To rejoice To help To detach To sit
12.
Transitive
120
13.
Uvarama
Intransitive
75 75
14.
Uvavisa
intransitive
15.
Uvasama
To calm down
Intransitive
75
16.
Uşsasa
To breathe
Intransitive
O (39) Onanda
1.
Transitive
130
To welcome, To greet
Ka (7)
Intransitive
Kanda Kampa
59 49
Intransitive
Katta
Transitive
120
Kara
Transitive
130
Kalanka
Transitive
120
wam w or cooo
Kalaha
Intransitive
To weep To tremble To cut, To saw To do To stigmatise To quarrel To say To play To grieve To buy To sport To thresh
49 130
Kaha
Transitive
Kidda
49,68
Kilisa
75
Intransitive Intransitive Transitive Intransitive Transitive
Kina Kila Kutta
138
68
12.
120
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
273

Page #297

S.No. Prakṛta
Verb
13.
14.
15.
16.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
1.
2.
274
Kudda
Kuppa
Kulla
Kokka
Kha ()
Khanja
Khanda
Khana
Khama
Khaya
Khä
Khāsa
Khimsa
Khijja
Khiva
Khisa
Khedda
Khela
Ga (T)
Gaccha
Gajja

English
Transitive/
Translation Intransitive
To jump
Intransitive 68
To anger
Transitive
138
To jump
Intransitive
49
To invite, To call Transitive
120
To limp
To break into
pieces
To dig
To forgive
To end,
To disappear,
To vanish
To eat
To cough
To criticise,
To blame
To grieve
To throw
Intransitive
Transitive
To go
To roar,
To thunder
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
To move away Intransitive
To play
Intransitive
To play
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Page No.

75
138
120
138
59
75
75
130
75
138
68
138
75
75
49
138
59
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #298

S.No. Prākṛta
Verb
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Gadayaḍa
Gaṇa
Garaha
Gala
Gavesa
Gå
Gäa
Gijjha
Guñja
Gundha
Gha (a)
Ghuma
Ca ()
Cakkha
Cara
Cava
Căva
Cinta
Cittha
Cina
English
Translation

To whine
Intransitive
To count
Transitive
To blame
Transitive
To vanish
Intransitive
To search out, Transitive
To discover
To sing
To sing
To attach
To roar
To braid,
To weave
together strips
To go round
To taste
To graze
To speak
To chew
To worry,
To think
To sit
To pick
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
Transitive/ Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive

Page No.
75
138
120
59
120
130
138
75
68
138
49
120, 138
112
130
138
130
59
120
275

Page #299

S.No. Praksta
Verb
English Translation
Transitivel Intransitive
Page No.
Ciráva
Cua
10.
Cua
68 68 130, 138 68 130 68
11.
To delay Intransitive To drop
Intransitive To renounce Transitive To mistake Intransitive To break Transitive To endeavour intransitive To oil
Transitive To thieve Transitive
Cukka
12.
Cúra
13.
14.
Cettha Coppada Corāva
120
15.
130
To shine
Intransitive
75
Cha (53) Chajja Chadda Chala
To renounce
Transitive
120
To cheat,
Transitive
120
Chutta
Intransitive
68
Chubbha
Intransitive
To dupe To separate To agitate To touch To give up To peel
Transitive
Chuva Choda Cholla
75 120 120
Transitive
Transitive
120
Ja (5) Jambhā
Intransitive
75
To yawn To wake up To produce
Jagga Jana
Intransitive
Transitive
130
Jamma
Intransitive
68
To emerge, To appear
Jaya
To win,
Transitive
138
To conquer
276
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #300

Prakrta Verb
Page No.
English Translation
Transitivel Intransitive
Jara
59
Jala
59
Ja
Intransitive Intransitive Transitive Intransitive Transitive
138
68
Jāgara Jána
0
112
amell
Transitive
138
Jingha Jiņa
12.
1
Transitive
138
To grow old To burn To go To wake up To know, To understand To smell To win, To conquer To partake of food To live To fight To partake of food To illuminate To fight
13.
1 Jima
Transitive
120
14.
Jiva
Intransitive
11
15.
Intransitive
49
Jujjha Jema
16.
130
Transitive
138
Joa Joha
18.
Intransitive
75
Jha (9)
Jha
Transitive
138
To meditate To meditate
Jhăa
Transitive
144
Tha (8) Tha
To stay
Intransitive
11
Da (7)
Damsa
Transitive
130
To sting To fear
Dara
Intransitive
| 49
Prakrta Grammar and Composition
277

Page #301

S.No.
Page No.
Prakrta Verb
English Translation
Transitivel Intransitive
| 138
Daha Dula
To burn Transitive To move about Intransitive
59
Dha () Dhakka
1.
To cover
Transitive
120
Ņa (UT)
Nacca
Nama
To dance To salute To disappear To drop, To drip, To trickle
Intransitive Transitive Intransitive
Nassa Nijjhara
130 59 59
Intransitive
Transitive
138
Nirakkha Nisuņa
Transitive
130
tam worria o +
To see To hear To come out To bathe
Nisara
49
Intransitive Intransitive
Nhà
11
Ta (a)
To flounder
Intransitive
49
Tadaphada Tava
Intransitive
| 68
To shine like flame, To mortify To break
Tutta
Intransitive
59
Toda
To break
Transitive
120
Tha (1)
Thambha
Intransitive
49.75
To stop, To halt
278
Prákyta Grammar and Composition

Page #302

S.No. Prákệta
Verb
English Translation
Transitivel Intransitive
Page No.
Thakka
Intransitive
49
To tire To pray
Thuna
Transitive
130
Da (c)
Daha
Transitive
138
To burn, To kindle
Da
Transitive
i no ti
To give To ache
130 59
Dukkha
Intransitive
Dekkha
To see
Transitive
120
Dha (ET) Dhāra
To hold,
Transitive
130
Transitive
144
Dhāva
Transitive
138
i rist
To carry To run To wash To reproach
Dhoa
Transitive
120
Dhikkara
Transitive
138
Pa (T)
Pada
Intransitive
49 130
Padha
Transitive
Panama
To fall To read To salute, To greet To run away To spread
Transitive Transitive
112 132
inni wo
Palä
Intransitive
59
Pasara
Intransitive
59
Pāla
To bring up,
112
Transitive Transitive Transitive
To nurture, To observe, To obey
132
132
Transitive
132
Praksta Grammar and Composition
279

Page #303

S.No. Prákyta
Verb
English Translation
Transitivel Intransitive
Page No.
Pava
Transitive
138
Pia, Piba
Transitive
130
Transitive
130
10
Pida Pisa Pukkara
Transitive
120
To get To drink To oppress To grind To shout, To call To see To send
11.
Transitive
120
Transitive
130
Peccha Pesa
13.
Transitive
144
Pha (6)
Phada
To tear
Transitive
120
Phura
68
To appear To bloom
Intransitive Intransitive
Phulla
68
mi amian w
Ba (a)
Bandha
To tie
Transitive
| 130, 144
Biha
75
Bukka
59
To fear Intransitive To bark
Intransitive To understand Transitive To speak
Transitive
Bujjha
138
Bolla
130
Bha (1) Bhaņa Bhuña
Transitive
130
To say To eat
Transitive
138
280
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #304

S.No. Prakṛta Verb
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Ma (H)
Maila
Magga
Mara
Māṇa
Māra
Muccha
Muna
X
Ya (य)
Ya
Ra (3)
Ranga
Rakkha
Rakkha
Rama
Raya
Rucca
Ruva
Rūsa
Rokka
English
Transitive/
Translation Intransitive

To dirty
To demand
To die
To honour
To kill
To faint
To know
To go
To colour
To keep
To protect
To wander
happily
To make,
To create
To shine,
To glitter
To weep
To sulk
To withhold
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Transitive

Page No.
130
130
49
138
130
49
130, 138
138
130
138
112, 144
68
138
49
49
49
1
120
281

Page #305

S.No. Prākṛta Verb
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
282
La (~)
Lajja
Labha
Liha
Liha
Lukka
Ludha
Le
Loṭṭa
Va (a)
Vanda
Vakkhāṇa
Vacca
Vaddha
Vanna
Vaddhāva
Vala
Vasa
Vaha
Viasa

English Translation
To embarrass
To obtain,
To take
To write
To lick
To hide
To fall down,
To tumble
down
To take
To sleep,
To roll about
Transitive/ Intransitive
Intransitive
49
Transitive
138
Transitive
138
Transitive
130
Transitive
138
Intransitive
1
Intransitive 59
Transitive
Intransitive
To salute
Transitive
To lecture
Transitive
To go
Transitive
To increase
Intransitive
To describe
Transitive
To congratulate Transitive
To turn
Intransitive
To reside
Intransitive
To hold
Transitive
To bloom,
Intransitive
To blossom
Page No.

130
68
138
130
138
68
130
130
59
68
130
68
Präkrta Grammar and Composition

Page #306

S.No. Prákṛta
Verb
11.
12.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Vijja
Vinnä
Sa (स)
Saya
Siñca
Sikkha
Sijjha
Sukkha
Suna
Sumara
Seva
Soha
Ha (3)
Hana
Harisa
Hava
Hasa
Himsa
Hu
Ho
English
Translation

To exist
To know
To sleep
To irrigate
To learn
To succeed
To dry up,
To dry
To hear,
To listen
To remember
To serve
To shine
To kill
To rejoice
To become
To laugh
To injure
To become,
To exist
To become,
To exist
Pråkrta Grammar and Composition
Transitive/ Intransitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Intransitive
Transitive
Intransitive
Intransitive

Page No.
68
130
1
130
138
68
59
112
112
130
130
59
130
59
68
1
130
59
11,59
283

Page #307

Reference Books
1. Abhinava Prāksta Vyakarana : Dr. Nemichand Sastri
(Tara Pablikeśana,
Váránasi) 2. Apabhraṁsa of Hemacandra : Dr. Käntilála Baladevarama
Vyāsa (Prāksta Text Society) 3. Apabhraíša-Hindi Koša,
: Dr. Nareśa Kumāra Bhaga 1-2
(Indo-Vijana Prā. Lt.) II A, 220, Nehru Nagar,
Gājiyābāda) 4. Hemacandra Apabhramhsa Vyakaraña : Dr. Kamalchand Sogani
Sūtra Vivecana (Jainavidya Ke Muni (Jainavidya Samsăthana, Nayanandi Va Kanakamara Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Viseşānka Sarkhyā 7, 8
Kșetra Sri Mahaviraji,
Rājasthan) 5. Hemacandra Prakrta Vyakarana : Vyākhyātā Śri Pyara Candaji Bhaga 1-2
Mahārāja (Śri Jaina Divākara Divya Jyoti Kāryalaya,
Mevādi Bājāra, Byāvara) 6. Pala-Sadda-Mahannavo
: Paṁ. Haragovindadása Trikamacanda Setha Prákyta Grantha Parişad,
Vārāṇasi) 7. Prāksta Bhāṣāorh Ka Vyakaraña : Dr. R. Pischel
(Bihāra Ráştrabhāṣā
Parişad, Patanā) 8. Prāksta Margopadeśikā
: Pam. Becaradās Jivaraja Dośī (Motilāla Banarasidasa, Delhi)
284
Prakrta Grammar and Composition

Page #308

9. Praudha Apabhramsa Racană : Dr. Kamal Chand Sogani Saurabha
(Apabhraṁsa Sahitya Academy, Digambara Jaina Atisaya Kșetra Śri Mahaviraji,
Rajasthan) 10. Praudha Prakrta Racană
: Dr. Kamal Chand Sogani Saurabha
(Apabhraṁsa Sāhitya Academy, Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Kșetra Śri Mahāviraji,
Rajasthan) 11. Praudha Racanānuvāda Kaumudi : Dr. Kapiladeva Dvivedi
(Viśvavidyalaya, Prakāśana, Vārānasi)
Prāksta Grammar and Composition
285

Page #309

Page #310